JP6881773B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is provided with a display control means for playing a variable display game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects on a display device, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Regarding possible gaming machines.

In the gaming machine, the variable display game is executed when the game ball passes (wins) in the starting area (for example, the starting winning opening). In the variable display game, the variable display of the symbol object is performed in various modes, and in particular, the high-speed variable display is performed in the middle of the display (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-126438

However, in recent gaming machines, since the symbol object is made semi-transparent at the time of high-speed variable display, the player does not know how the symbol object is variablely displayed unless the display mode of the symbol object is devised. May not be recognized.

An object of the present invention is to make it possible for a gaming machine to easily recognize a variable display mode of a symbol object during a variable display game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, the display device is provided with display control means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects to play a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the player is notified. In a gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous special gaming state, the variable display game has a preliminary motion display period for displaying a preliminary motion at the start of the variable display game and a period in which the variable speed is immediately after the end of the preliminary motion display. The display control means includes the high-speed fluctuation display period faster than the fluctuation speed of the symbol object, the temporary stop display period for temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol object, and the stop display period for stopping and displaying the symbol object. The size of the preparatory movement display period can be made larger than the size of the high-speed fluctuation display period, and the size of the symbol object in the temporary stop display period or the stop display period can be displayed in the high-speed fluctuation display. It can be larger than the size in the period .

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to easily recognize the variable display mode of the symbol object in the variable display game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a sorting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object during the high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object during the high-speed variation display. It is a table which shows the relationship between the fluctuation mode or the change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object in the high-speed variation display, and the frame. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect display editing process which concerns on a large symbol object, a small symbol object, a hold object and the like. It is a figure which shows the variation mode in the high-speed variation display of a large symbol object (medium symbol). It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display. It is a table which shows the relationship between the fluctuation mode or change mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display, and a frame. It is a figure which shows the change mode of the hold object, (a) shows the case where the amplitude of fluctuation is large, (b) shows the case where the amplitude of fluctuation is medium, and (c) shows the case where the amplitude of fluctuation is small. Fluctuation display This is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the start of a game. Fluctuation display This is a transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object at the start of the game. Variable display This is a table showing the relationship between the variable mode or the variable mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the start of the game and the frame. Fluctuation display This is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the end of the game (or freeze effect). Variation display This is a transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object at the end of the game (or freeze effect). Variable display This is a table showing the relationship between the variable mode or the variable mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the game (or freeze effect) and the frame. It is a transition diagram which shows the variation mode or the variation mode (variation example) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object at the end of the variation display game (or freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (third modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (third modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variation display. It is a figure explaining the region which the effect button is reflected in the glass frame before and after the movement of the effect button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button reflected in the back of the glass frame before and after the movement of the effect button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure explaining the flow of the light ray from the effect button which enters the field of view of a player. It is a figure explaining the region which the effect button is reflected in the glass frame before and after the movement of the effect button of the modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button reflected in the back of the glass frame before and after the movement of the effect button of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the movement mode of the effect button of the 2nd modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the movement mode of the effect button of the 3rd modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the region where the effect button of the 4th modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is reflected in a glass frame, and the region where a player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button reflected in the back of a glass frame. It is a cross-sectional view of the protrusion effect unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure explaining the flow of the light ray from the protrusion effect unit which enters the field of view of a player. It is a schematic side view of the game board and the like which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure explaining the flow of the light ray from the stage part which enters the field of view of a player, and the start winning opening. This is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes a variable display game as an effect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen by the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the game state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game (game) displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the start memory in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability variation state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (special game state). ).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes having different launching forces. Can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided, and a second starting winning opening (second start winning area) is provided immediately below the start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. An ordinary variable winning device 37 provided with a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (a state in which the game ball is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probabilistic state (excluding the latent probabilistic state), the time saving state (normal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, an attacker-type opening / closing door is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having a 39c is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, a count switch 39a (large winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, a light emitting member that illuminates the large winning opening is arranged in the large winning opening or in the vicinity of the large winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass through only in the case of a probability variation jackpot. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game control device 100 shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot ends. In addition to confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the above is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 (normal figure display, lamps D10, D18) for the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the start (hold) storage number of each fluctuation display game. It has a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56). Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is provided with a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). D8), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D17) that displays the status, and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed. In addition, all the LEDs provided as a display turn on all the lights (all LEDs blink at the same time), or cycle lights (one LED turns on and off in a predetermined order at a predetermined time), or a plurality of LEDs. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 includes a lamp display unit (LED) that executes a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighting display and an extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol), and each special symbol. It has a lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the start (hold) storage number of the variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later). The lamp display unit (LED) for starting (holding) storage number notification of each special figure fluctuation display game ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but when it is not in the big hit state (reach described later on the display device 41). (Including the case where is occurring), the number of holds is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the types of winning winning openings are issued via the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal map fluctuation display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure change display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of special figure start prize memories stored is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (blinking) is repeated (blinking) in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80. 4th symbol) fluctuates. The fluctuation display of the lamp display unit is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "lighting" in the case of a miss and "turning off" in the case of a big hit.

On the contrary, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) can be stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "turning on" in the case of a big hit. .. In addition, a plurality of LEDs (fourth symbol LEDs) are provided as each lamp display unit, and one of the plurality of LEDs is lit in the case of disconnection, and all the plurality of LEDs are lit in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning is the jackpot value), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 1 display 51 or the special In the display 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire a large number of game balls. To.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 39a. Uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which is provided with a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. .. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects a CPU unit 110 having a 111 (referred to as), an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120, and an output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the voltage of DC32V. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability (only when there is a small hit), but other game conditions (directing, etc.) other than the probability. Can be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or may provide a dedicated set value change switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at positions that cannot be operated (positions that cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1), the probability setting value 2 (setting 2), the probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and the probability setting value 4 (setting). 4), there are a probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → Setting value 5 (Setting 6, probability setting value 6) → Setting value 0 (Setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work set value and the probability set value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information on the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expectations are different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot of the reach production is increased in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability of becoming a big hit when the production is selected, and the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit and the selection rate of the production when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selectivity and the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot of a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Symbol random numbers (only when there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) Based on the random number generation circuit for generation and the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, the timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (millisecond)) and the update timing of the random number generation circuit are given to the CPU 111a. It has a clock generator that generates a clock.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. These are connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game ball from the special variable winning device 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from the vibration sensor 65 that detects the vibration of the game machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 that takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid) to open the special variable winning device 39, and the like. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is a first driver (drive circuit) that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving open / close data signals of the general electric current solenoid 37c and the grand prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134. 138a, the second driver 138b that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via a segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via a digit wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driving driver 150 is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls as a performance display.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning balls) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the total with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. The board decoration device 46 may include the above-mentioned lamp display device 80.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol on the normal map display 53 in a predetermined time variation, the normal map variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display 53, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example). , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

In addition, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the game is in the normal power support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support is executed.

For example, in the time-reduced state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game is set to the second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example). 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening number (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, the state shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. FIG. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear). The process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply recovered.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as a RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c) (A1015). Here, the flag of the assumption of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM error flag indicating a RAM error is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in steps A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation mode), in step A1041-144 The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the process at the time of normal power-on (power recovery) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”). An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. Is output to (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the setting change operation (both on operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed, but the probability setting changing flag is set, there is an abnormality. , A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) that there is an abnormality in the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), The on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As described above, even when the information about the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the flag for changing the probability setting is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Set the probability setting checking flag indicating that the setting is being checked (A1032). Then, the command under confirmation of probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but remain when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 allows interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the process at the time of the power failure in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure does not occur, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1038), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and the unused area, a work area related to the performance information and its display (performance display), and a configuration that does not clear the stack area are also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball output rate, the base value (the ball output rate in the normal game state), the accessory ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 has a normal power supply because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”). The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure recovery process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Move to the processing of.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include the setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating the setting value information (setting information) which is the information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 or the like. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command for both Special Figures 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number) (only when there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure Save in a predetermined area of RWM (A1048) as the start value of the initial value (random number of initial value per hit), the initial value of the random number of the fall lottery used in the fall lottery (random number of the initial value of the fall lottery), etc., and allow the interruption (A1049). ). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, for jackpot symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if it is not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

The game control device 100 is an actuator such as a solenoid (for example, a large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set in various processes when the probability setting is not changed or the probability setting is not confirmed (the result of A1304 is “N”). Output processing for performing drive control of the solenoid and drive control of the LED (light emission control) is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308) and random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (the front frame and the glass frame are opened). The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1315 are executed.

When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure game process for performing the process related to the special figure variation display game (A1312). The details of the special figure game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1314), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning device 39 is based on the inputs from the large winning port switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning port switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 of the special variable winning device 39. Is monitored, and when an abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability set value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability set value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. Whether or not it is determined (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 when it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is “N”) (A2409). When there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

When the game control device 100 receives an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. Along with updating by +1 the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 according to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during the setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the work setting is set. The value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area) It is possible to prevent the situation where the value) is changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display, and the like. Figure The processing during fluctuation is executed (A2609). For example, in the special symbol changing process, necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number "2" related to the special symbol display process is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of jackpot and sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. The special figure display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the necessary information such as the fanfare command and the fanfare time is set, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set. Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the large winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A2612), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, a processing number "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, the probability state after the end of the jackpot state and the normal power support state after the end of the jackpot state ( Set necessary information such as (time saving state), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (number of time reduction fluctuations, number of electric support) of the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state and the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. ) Information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special time reduction period (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A2707. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and the normal variable winning device 37 must be hit by the right side to win a prize. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing right-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). If there is no winning in the second starting opening winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the Fuden fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal operation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2913). In the special figure hold information determination process, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the saved jackpot random number and the stop symbol information based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (number of variation before reach). And the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2914), and the effect command setting process (A2915) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3206). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3211), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A3211). The result of (A3212) is that the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs an effect command setting process (A3214), and proceeds to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215), and the special figure game processing number. The processing number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3204). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the normal process of the special figure is terminated.

Further, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3208), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3209). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure of the special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the normal process of the special figure is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3207) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 1 variation display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss or a big hit and the missed stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the number of rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number are acquired and saved.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of special figure reservations related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 11 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 2 variation display game (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 is performed for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A3807), and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probability variation state). (A3803). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3808). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

First, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201) and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the added value in the variable distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4302), prepares the address, and prepares the target variable pattern random number. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and if it is out of order (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (the result of A4304 is "N"), the sorting process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares (A4307) the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, and holds the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (hold). Load the variation pattern random number 2 from (for equation 1) and prepare it (A4308). Then, the distribution process is executed (A4309), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is generated from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data in the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is specified. Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is less than "0" (A4405). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to create a new disturbance. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above process is executed in step A4405 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table). Then, in step A4405, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4407), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sorting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 starts with the head data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). Check if is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, in the game control device 100, when the first data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is completed. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (second half fluctuation). The first distribution value specified in the group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the sorting process is completed.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and the effect command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set game sequence branch table of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the normal figure game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the normal figure game processing number is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The normal processing is executed (A7608), in which information necessary for performing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map is set. The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 22.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing (the game control device 100). A7609). For example, in the normal map variable processing, in order to shift to the normal map display processing, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal map game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power according to whether or not the time is shortened. The normal map display processing is executed (A7610), in which the opening time is set, the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set, and the like. For example, in the normal map display process, when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, "3" is set as the game process number and the normal map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the normal drawing game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the normal electric remaining ball processing. Save to the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the Fuzu hit end processing, "5" is set as the game processing number and saved in the Fuzu game processing number area, and the Fuzu ending time is set to the Fuzu game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal figure per end process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the normal figure game process number area in order to shift to the normal figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A7614 when the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901). When the number of holdings of the normal figure is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the normal process transition setting process 1 of the normal figure is executed (A7923), and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. In the normal-figure normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal-figure game processing number area in order to shift to the normal-figure normal processing.

Further, when the number of reserved numbers is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads a random number per RWM from the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and RWM. The hit symbol random number is loaded from the normal symbol per symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal figure high probability (in the high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state) (A7904). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7904 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7905). , When the high probability of the normal figure is in progress (the result of A7904 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure is set (A7906), and the step A7907 is performed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). The upper limit judgment value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal figure. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

The game control device 100 saves the hit flag area when the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "Y"), that is, when the hit flag area is missed (A7909). Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7910), the out-of-order symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

When the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "N"), that is, in the case of hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7912) and converts it into the loaded hit symbol random number. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915) and saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, prepare a Fuzu command corresponding to information related to the Fuzu variation display game (particularly information on hit / miss of the Fuzu variation display game) as an effect command (A7917), and execute the effect command setting process. (A7918). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (A7919), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A79220), and then the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (A7921).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3 in the random number storage area per normal figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during the normal map change (A7922), and ends the normal map normal process. In the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal map variable processing, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map fluctuation time is saved in the normal map game processing number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether or not the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, steps B0003 and B0004). May be executed between). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer (timekeeping means) may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process (B0015) that edits and controls the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41, and determines the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Execute the effect display editing process (B0017). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0023 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of command receptions is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the analysis command area. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower ranks of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.) is determined. Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, for example, a variable command (A3407). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the jackpot command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a jackpot. For example, a fanfare command (A2610) for commanding a fanfare screen or a round screen is commanded. Round command (A2611) for commanding, interval command (A2612) for commanding the interval screen, ending command (A2612) for commanding the ending screen, and the like. Then, when the MODE unit represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the jackpot command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include, for example, decorative special symbol commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes, for example, the look-ahead stop symbol command (A2913). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation command includes, for example, the look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is completed.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is performed. finish.

When the MODE unit does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the power failure recovery command (B1305). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (". B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / illegal commands. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents the out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. Whether or not it is determined (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) when the MODE unit does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the set value reception processing, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting change type command (B1325). As a command for changing the setting, for example, there is a command (A1030) for changing the probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation command when the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “N”) (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) for confirming probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command during probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, the game state flag is set to the normal state as an example, but the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit" depending on the timing when this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute a process for a command not shown in FIG. 26.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information of the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the read-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is being waited for (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and sets a look-ahead variation MODE command (B1703). Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When the converted MODE section and ACT section are both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE section and ACT section corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Holds vary When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are various types of normal reach, such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead fluctuation command area. (B1711), a look-ahead lottery process relating to the latest hold look-ahead effect is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the pre-reading effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved or when the number of holds is reduced) (B1717). ). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold look-ahead effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or when the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"). As it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is an outlier symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol (4R-A1, symbol 1), a 4R normal jackpot symbol (4R-A2, symbol 2), and an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (8R-A1, symbol 1). It corresponds to the symbol 3), the 8R normal jackpot symbol (8R-A2, symbol 4), the 12R probability variation jackpot symbol (12R-A1, symbol 5), and the 12R normal jackpot symbol (12R-A2, symbol 6).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 30) described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution group corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and setting information (set value). The address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address (B2005).

The effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (set value) (B2007), and ACT the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the department is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect (B2013) and sets the display of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set, and for example, the display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is also possible to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. May be good.

[Hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the hit command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the hit command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the hit command is a big hit fanfare command (or a small hit fanfare command if there is a small hit), the fanfare effect is set. The fanfare effect setting process for this is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the hit-type command process is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round when the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command (or a command during which the small hit is open if there is a small hit), the effect control device 300 determines the round effect. The setting process is executed, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set during the round (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command process is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE unit represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 is executed. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the interval (B2108, B2109), and the hit system command processing is terminated. (In addition, if there is a small hit and the big winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, if the small hit is one round, there is no interval command.)

When the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents the ending (the result of B2107 is "N"). B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command (or the small hit end screen command if there is a small hit), the effect control device 300 determines the ending effect. The ending effect setting process for setting is executed, the ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is terminated. ..

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the hit command process without executing any process. To do.

[Variation mode or change mode of large symbol object, small symbol object, reserved object]
FIG. 33 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a that are being displayed in the display device 41 at high speed. FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a that are being displayed in the display device 41 at high speed. FIG. 35 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 15, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display, and the frame.

As shown in FIG. 33 (for example, (a1)), the variable display area 610 is arranged in the central portion of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610A (first large symbol object) is arranged on the left side of the variable display area 610. The large symbol object 610B (first large symbol object) is arranged on the right side of the variable display area 610, and the large symbol object 610C (second large symbol object) is arranged in the center of the variable display area 610. In FIG. 33 (a1), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C all display "7" as identification information, but any identification information (integer from 1 to 9) can be displayed. .. Further, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are configured such that the identification information (for example, "7") is described on the front surface or the back surface of the rectangular plate-shaped main body, but the main body is eliminated and the identification information (for example, "" It may be composed of only 7 ”).

Further, a hold digestion area 640 is arranged at a position below the large symbol object 610C at the lower part of the display device 41, and a hold display unit 630a (special figure 1 hold display unit) is arranged on the left side thereof. .. Further, the right side of the reserved digestion area 640 is a special figure 2 reserved display unit. In the special figure 1 hold display unit (hold display unit 630a) and the special figure 2 hold display unit, the hold objects 633 before digestion are arranged in a line according to the number of holds (maximum 4 pieces), and the hold digestion is performed. Area 640 displays the pending object 633a being digested. The hold object 633a is a hold display corresponding to the start memory (hold during change) of the special figure change display game being executed. The special figure 1 hold display unit displays the hold object 633 (hold display) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 hold, special figure 1 start memory), and the special figure 2 hold display unit is the second. The hold object 633 (hold display) corresponding to the start memory (special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 start memory) is displayed.

At the upper right of the display device 41 (on the right side of the large symbol object 610B), the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are arranged in order from the top. The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. .. Therefore, two hold objects 633 are displayed on the special figure 1 hold display unit (hold display unit 630a), and the hold object 633 is not displayed on the special figure 2 hold display unit.

Further, a small symbol object 615 is arranged at the lower right of the display device 41 (on the right side of the special drawing 2 hold display unit). The small symbol object 615 displays, for example, identification information consisting of Chinese numerals "1" to "9". Although only one is displayed in FIG. 33, for example, three small symbol objects are displayed in a horizontal row. 615 may be displayed.

As described above, the reserved object 633a is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Therefore, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 execute the variable display game accompanying the digestion of the reserved object 633a (starting memory).

In the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol objects 615 are variablely displayed. Further, the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be variably displayed in which the displayed form (shape, pattern, etc.) changes with time regardless of the execution of the variable display game, but are variably displayed only during the variable display game. You may do so.

The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are variable-displayed in the order of preliminary operation, low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, and temporary stop fluctuation in the fluctuation display game. Further, the variation mode (variation display mode) is different between the large symbol objects 610A and 610B and the large symbol object 610C.

The small symbol object 615 synchronizes with the update period (for example, 1/30 second, 33.3 ms) of the screen (frame) of the display device 41 (or at a cycle of an integral multiple of the update period) during the variable display game. The identification information from "1" to "9" is sequentially switched.

The reserved objects 633 and 633a are variably displayed (variable display) in such a manner that the shape vibrates at a predetermined cycle.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) sets the large symbol objects 610A and 610B from the upper end (base end) of the specific path (here, the straight path along the vertical direction) to the lower end (end) of the specific path. After moving toward and disappearing, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B to which the identification information (first identification information) has been switched are moved from the upper end (base end) to the lower end (end end) and disappeared. In a repeating manner, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled. As the specific route, not only a straight route extending in the vertical direction but also various routes such as a linear route inclined in a predetermined direction and an arc-shaped curved route can be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) displays the large symbol object 610C in a stepwise axial rotation manner, and the front surface or the back surface on which the identification information (second identification information) is displayed is displayed. The large symbol object 610C is variably displayed in such a manner that the front surface and / or the back surface are alternately displayed so as to be viewed from the front and the identification information (second identification information) is switched each time the front surface and / or the back surface are viewed from the front.

The large symbol object 610C has, for example, a display mode that rotates in the axial direction so that the front surface and the back surface on which the identification information is displayed alternately appear at a predetermined position (center of the screen), and at the timing when the front surface or the back surface is viewed from the front. The variation is displayed due to the rotation variation in which the identification information is switched (see FIG. 37 (a)). The large symbol object 610C is rotated in such a manner that the portion on the left side of the rotation axis moves to the back side of the paper surface and the portion on the right side moves to the front side of the paper surface, but it may be rotated in the opposite direction.

In low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling, and the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a variable manner due to rotational fluctuation. It becomes faster in the order of low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation. The fluctuation speed of the small symbol object 615 is constant in low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation.

The preliminary operation is a display in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C move a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the vertical scroll direction before entering the low-speed fluctuation. The temporary stop variation is a variation display immediately before the end of the variation display game, and is a variation display in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C vibrate in the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle.

[High-speed fluctuation display]
The fluctuation mode (variation display mode) during the high-speed fluctuation display will be described. Here, the fluctuation display such as the high-speed fluctuation display sequentially updates and displays the frame (screen). In FIGS. 33 and 34, for example, a case where the 125th (arbitrary number) frame from the 101st (arbitrary number) frame is used will be described.

In the frame 101 shown in FIG. 33 (a1), the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41, and each displays the identification information “7”. ing. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information "7" is viewed in front of the central portion of the display device 41. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in the most inflated form (shape "large") (FIG. 41).

In the frame 102 (the frame next to the frame 101) shown in FIG. 33 (a2), the large symbol object 610A is displayed at a position on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed. , Is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and each displays the identification information "7", but has not moved in the horizontal direction as compared with the frame 101 (hereinafter,). The same applies).

The large symbol object 610C is displayed at a predetermined position (center of the screen) with the entire object rotated 60 degrees in the axial direction from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the identification information "7" is displayed diagonally. The figure of the seen aspect is displayed. The direction of shaft rotation is such that the left side moves to the back and the right side moves to the front from the rotation axis, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. Further, the large symbol object 610C does not move in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction as compared with the frame 101 (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "eight", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 103 (the frame next to the frame 102) shown in FIG. 33 (a3), the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed on the lower right side of the display device 41. The identification information "7" is displayed for each. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front.

Here, since the large symbol object 610C can be made transparent except for the identification information, in this case, as shown in (a3), the outer shape of the identification information "7" is inverted left and right and viewed from an angle. The figure is displayed (Fig. 35). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "9", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large"). A part of the large symbol object 610A is displayed in a mode hidden by the hold object 633, but conversely, a part (or all) of the hold object 633 is displayed in a mode hidden by the large symbol object 610A. You may (and so on).

In the frame 104 (the frame next to the frame 103) shown in FIG. 33 (a4), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B displaying the identification information "7" disappear, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41. The large symbol object 610A for displaying is displayed, and the large symbol object 610B for displaying the identification information “8” is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed in front and the back surface is viewed in front, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the back surface. There is. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "1", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 105 (the frame next to the frame 104) shown in FIG. 33 (a5), the large symbol object 610A is displayed at a position on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed. Is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 at a position centered in the height direction, and each displays the identification information "8". The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and a graphic in a mode in which the identification information "8" is viewed from an angle is displayed. .. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "two", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 106 (the frame next to the frame 105) shown in FIG. 33 (a6), the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed on the lower right side of the display device 41. The identification information "8" is displayed for each. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is inverted left and right and viewed from an angle. The figure is displayed. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "three", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 107 (the frame next to the frame 106) shown in FIG. 33 (a7), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B displaying the identification information “8” disappear, and the identification information “9” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41. The large symbol object 610A for displaying is displayed, and the large symbol object 610B for displaying the identification information “9” is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a manner in which the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed in front and the surface is viewed in front, and the identification information "9" is displayed on the surface. There is. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four". The reserved objects 633 and 633a switch from the most inflated form (shape “large”) to the one-step contracted form (shape “medium”) (FIG. 41).

In the frame 108 (the frame next to the frame 107) shown in FIG. 33 (a8), the large symbol object 610A is displayed at a position on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed. It is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 at a position centered in the height direction, and each displays the identification information "9". The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and a graphic in a mode in which the identification information "9" is viewed from an angle is displayed. .. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "five", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "medium").

In the frame 113 (frame 5 frames after the frame 108) shown in FIG. 34 (a9), the large symbol object 610A displaying the identification information “2” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the right side of the display device 41. A large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information "2" is displayed at the upper part. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in such a manner that the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surface. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one". The reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from a one-step contracted form (shape “medium”) to a two-step contracted form (shape “small”) (FIG. 41).

In the frame 119 (frame 6 frames after the frame 113) shown in FIG. 34 (a10), a large symbol object 610A displaying the identification information "4" is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the right side of the display device 41. A large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information "4" is displayed at the upper part. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in such a manner that the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surface. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven". The reserved objects 633 and 633a switch from the shape "small" to the shape "medium" (FIG. 41).

In the frame 125 (frame 6 frames after the frame 119) shown in FIG. 34 (a11), a large symbol object 610A displaying the identification information "6" is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the right side of the display device 41. A large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information "6" is displayed at the upper part. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in such a manner that the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four". The reserved objects 633 and 633a switch from the shape "medium" to the shape "large" (FIG. 41).

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B move in the order of the upper part, the central part, and the lower part of the display device 41 in a state of having the same identification information (same form) using three frames. Is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610C, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed in only one frame. Further, the shape of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes every 6 frames, and returns to the original shape in the frame 125.

As shown in FIG. 35, the large symbol object 610A (FIG. 35: left symbol) and the large symbol object 610B (FIG. 35: right symbol) maintain the same identification information in the three frames, and the identification information is maintained every time the three frames are switched. Is displayed to switch. Therefore, the display period T1 of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B having the same form as the switching cycle P1 of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B is the same for 3 frames (100 ms).

The identification information of the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 35: middle symbol) is switched every three frames, but the display period T2 of the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is one frame (33.3 ms). ..

Therefore, the switching cycle P1 of the large symbol object 610C is 3 frames (100 ms), but the display period T2 of the large symbol object 610C of the same form is 1 frame (33.3 ms).

Since the identification information of the small symbol object 615 is switched every time one frame is switched, the switching cycle P2 of the small symbol object 615 and the display period S1 of the small symbol object 615 of the same form are the same for one frame (33.3 ms). Become.

In the reserved objects 633 and 633a, the shape "large", the shape "medium", and the shape "small" are displayed for 6 consecutive frames, and each time the 6 frames are switched, the shape "large", the shape "medium", and the shape "small" are displayed. , The shape is "medium", and the shape is "large", and this is repeated periodically. Therefore, the shaking period P3 (cycle in which the shape changes) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), and the display period H1 of the reserved objects 633 and 633a of the same form is 6 frames (200 ms).

In the present embodiment, regarding the display period (continuous display period) of each object of the same form, the display period S1 of the small symbol object 615 = the display period T2 (for one frame) of the large symbol object 610C <the large symbol objects 610A and 610B. The display period T1 (for 3 frames) <the display period H1 (for 6 frames) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

Here, since the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled and the amount of movement is large, it is easy to recognize that they are fluctuating. Further, since the large symbol objects 610A and 610B having the same identification information are vertically scrolled without changing the form, it can be recognized that they are the same even if the movement amount is large. Therefore, even if the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are semi-transparent, it can be easily recognized that the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling.

On the other hand, the large symbol object 610C has a small amount of movement (zero) due to rotational fluctuation. However, in the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C, the switching cycle P1 for switching the identification information is the same. The period for displaying the same identification information on the large symbol object 610C (for one frame) is shorter than the period for displaying the same identification information on the large symbol objects 610A and 610B (for three frames). Further, in a frame in which the large symbol object 610C does not display the identification information in front view, the large symbol object 610C having a shape different from that of the large symbol object 610C on which the identification information is displayed (even if a figure imitating the identification information is displayed, the figure is displayed. It does not have to be displayed) to show that the shape of the large symbol object 610C changes periodically. Therefore, even if the large symbol object 610C is semi-transparent, it can be easily recognized that the fluctuation display is performed due to the rotation fluctuation.

Further, the display period H1 (6 frames) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is made longer than the display period T1 (3 frames) of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B and the display period T2 (1 frame) of the large symbol object 610C. ing. As a result, the player naturally directs his / her line of sight to the person who is moving at high speed, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C when the object is fluctuating at high speed. Further, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are stopped (including the temporarily stopped state), the line of sight can be directed to the variably displayed reserved objects 633 and 633a.

As described above, the swing cycle P3 (cycle in which the shape changes) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), which is longer than the launch cycle (600 ms) of the game ball by the ball launcher. ing. Here, the launch of the game ball by the ball launcher is experienced by the player by the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, by making the shaking cycle P3 (800 ms) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a slower than the firing cycle (600 ms), the player can relax and enjoy the game relaxedly.

By the way, in the lamp display device 80, one LED of the two lower lamp display units (LEDs) notifies as the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the other LED is the special figure 2 variable display game. Notify as the fourth symbol. The two LEDs are controlled by the effect control device 300, and when playing the special figure 1 variable display game, one LED blinks at intervals of 100 ms (100 ms on, 100 ms off: cycle 200 ms), and the special figure 2 variable display game is played. When doing so, the other LED is blinking at intervals of 100 ms. Further, in the lamp display device 80, the two LEDs on the upper left (decorative special figure 1 hold LED1 and decorative special figure 1 hold LED2) have the number of decorative special figure 1 hold (first start) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. The number of stored decorations) is displayed, and the two LEDs on the upper right (decorative special figure 2 hold LED1, decorative special figure 2 hold LED2) are displayed according to the off state, lighting state, and blinking state, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number (second start memory). Number) is displayed. The blinking interval of the LED regarding these holds (number of holds) is also 100 ms (100 ms on, 100 ms off: cycle 200 ms). Therefore, it is also preferable to set the shaking period P3 of the reserved objects 633 and 633a to a period for three frames (100 ms) or an integral multiple thereof. Thereby, the vibration of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the blinking of the fourth symbol can be associated with each other.

Further, as described above, in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display 54 is composed of the lamps D11 and D12, and the special figure 2 hold display 55 is composed of the lamps D13 and D14.

In the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the lamp D11 or the lamp D12 lights up when the hold number is 1, the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 turn on when the hold number is 2, and the lamp D11 or the lamp D12 lights up when the hold number is 3. The lamp D12 blinks and the remaining lamps light up, and when the number of holdings is 4, the lamps D11 and the lamp D12 blink.

Similarly, when the number of holds is 1, the lamp D13 or the lamp D14 is lit, when the number of holds is 2, the lamps D13 and D14 are lit, and when the number of holds is 3, the hold indicator 55 is also lit. The lamp D13 or the lamp D14 blinks and the remaining lamps light up, and when the number of holdings is 4, the lamps D13 and the lamp D14 blink.

The game control device 100 controls the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55, and blinks the lamps D11-D14 at intervals of 128 ms (128 ms on, 128 ms off: period 256 ms). .. Therefore, it is also preferable to set the shaking period P3 of the reserved objects 633 and 633a to a period close to the blinking interval of 128 ms for the lamps D11-D14, for example, a period for 4 frames (133 ms) or an integral multiple of the period. Thereby, the vibration of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the blinking of the lamps D11-D14 can be related to each other.

[Production display editing process]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing a procedure of effect display editing processing relating to large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol objects 615, reserved objects 633, 633a, and the like. In the main process (FIG. 23), the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311 and VDP 312) contains one frame of image data including the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a. It is created for each (B0017) and displayed on the display device 41 (B0020). Thereby, in the variable display game, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be variablely displayed (displayed by moving images) in 1 frame units (33.3 ms units).

In step B2501, the effect control device 300 generates a symbol layer. Here, the effect control device 300 allocates the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol objects 615 to the symbol layer in the order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44, and 47) for each frame. The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, and the small symbol objects 615 can be selected independently, and a symbol layer is created by superimposing them as layers. Each layer has common plane coordinates for display on the display device 41, and information on the form (including identification information) of each object and position information on the plane coordinates of each object (displacement from the plane coordinate origin). Information) is included.

In step B2502, the effect control device 300 generates an information display layer. In the information display layer, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are assigned to the information display layer in the order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44, and 47) for each frame. 2. Information to be recognized by the player, such as the hold number display unit 660, right-handed display and left-handed display, is also appropriately assigned. In addition, the right-handed display and the left-handed display suggest the firing mode (right-handed or left-handed) to the player.

In step B2503, the effect control device 300 creates a background layer. The background layer is a layer on which the background displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41 is drawn.

In addition, in step B2504, the effect control device 300 generates an effect frame layer on which a predetermined effect image (effect image, etc.) is drawn.

In step B2505, the effect control device 300 generates image data by superimposing, for example, a background layer, a symbol layer, an information display layer, and an effect frame layer in this order, and sets this in the display frame buffer. As described above, the main process (FIG. 23) is looped with a cycle of 1/30 second. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can generate image data (frames) updated every 1 / 30th of a second and display them on the display device 41.

[Rotation mode of large symbol object]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a variation mode of the large symbol object 610C (medium symbol) during high-speed variation display. As described above, FIG. 37A has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched every time the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol) is rotated by 180 degrees. In FIG. 37 (a), the large symbol object 610C changes the shape of the symbol in such a manner that it rotates 60 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate 180 degrees by switching three frames. The VDP 312 may generate data of an inclined object (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) from the data of the reference object (0 degrees or 180 degrees) stored in the image ROM 325 by image processing, or may generate the data of the reference object (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) by image processing. All the data of the 0 degree or 180 degree) and the tilted object (60 degree, 120 degree, etc.) may be stored in the image ROM 325 in advance.

Further, in the large symbol object 610C in which the front surface (or the back surface) on which the identification information is displayed is rotated by 60 degrees from the front view, the figure in which the identification information "7" is viewed from an angle is displayed. , The figure may be omitted. Further, in the large symbol object 610C in which the front surface (or the back surface) is rotated by 120 degrees from the front view, the outer shape of the identification information “7” is flipped horizontally and the figure in the aspect viewed from an angle is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

Here, the large symbol object 610C has identification information (for example, "7") written on the front surface or the back surface of a rectangular plate-shaped main body, but the main body itself is transparent except for the frame of the main body. (The same applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c) described later).

FIG. 37B has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched each time the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol) is rotated by 360 degrees. In FIG. 37 (b), the large symbol object 610C changes the shape of the symbol in such a manner that it rotates by 120 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate by 360 degrees by switching by three frames.

In addition, in the large symbol object 610C in which the front surface (or back surface) on which the identification information is displayed is rotated by 120 degrees from the front view, the outer shape of the identification information "7" is inverted left and right and the figure is viewed from an angle. Is displayed, but the figure may be omitted. Further, in the large symbol object 610C in which the front surface (or the back surface) is viewed from the front and the axis is rotated by 240 degrees, the outer shape of the identification information "7" is flipped horizontally and a figure in an oblique view is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

FIG. 37C has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched each time the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol) is rotated by 180 degrees. In FIG. 37 (c), the large symbol object 610C changes the shape of the symbol in such a manner that it rotates 60 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate 180 degrees by switching three frames.

Further, in the large symbol object 610C in which the front surface (or the back surface) is viewed from the front and rotated by 60 degrees, a figure in which the identification information “7” is viewed from an angle is displayed, and the front surface (or the back surface) is viewed from the front. In the large symbol object 610C in which the axis is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture, the figure in which the switched identification information “8” is viewed from an angle is displayed.

[First modification of high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 38 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display. .. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display. .. FIG. 40 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or the variation mode (first modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display, and the frame. ..

As a first modification of the high-speed fluctuation display, the effect control device 300 (display control means) vertically aligns the large symbol objects 610A and 610B (first large symbol objects) in the order in which the identification information (first identification information) is switched. A plurality of first large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed side by side along a straight line path (specific route), and a plurality of first large symbol objects 610A and 610B having the same form are displayed in the same period. The first large symbol objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled (scrolled).

For example, as shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large symbol object 610A is a large symbol object 610A (A1) having identification information of "3" and a large symbol object having identification information of "2" in order from the top. A row of objects in which 610A (A2) and a large symbol object 610A (A3) having identification information of "1" are arranged is formed. Similarly, the large symbol object 610B includes the large symbol object 610B (B1) having the identification information of "5", the large symbol object 610B (B2) having the identification information of "4", and "3" in order from the top. Large symbol objects 610B (B3) having identification information are arranged to form an object sequence.

The large symbol object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3) display the same identification information for the same period, so that the large symbol object 610A (A1, A2, A3) And the vertical scroll of the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3) can be displayed. For example, considering the case where the identification information is switched once, the identification information before the switching disappears in the large symbol object 610A (A3), and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610A (A2) before the switching is displayed. The object. Further, in the large symbol object 610A (A2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610A (A1) before switching is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610A (A1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Similarly, in the large symbol object 610B (B3), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610B (B2) before switching is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610B (B2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610B (B1) before switching is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610B (B1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Therefore, scrolling in which the same identification information moves from top to bottom each time the switching is repeated is performed in order from the identification number appearing in the large symbol object 610A (A1) and the large symbol object 610B (B1). The identification information is displayed by scrolling from top to bottom in the order of 1 to 9, and then in the order of 1 to 9.

The large symbol object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3) have identification information displayed on a rectangular plate-shaped main body, and the scrolling was performed. Although the scroll of the identification information can be recognized, it may be difficult to recognize the scroll of the main body.

Therefore, although omitted in the figure, in the large symbol object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3), the main body is also formed by associating the color of the main body with the identification information. It can be recognized as scrolling. For example, (identification information, color information) are (1, red), (2, green), (3, blue), (4, red), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red). ), (8, green), (9, blue), it is possible to recognize that the main body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. In particular, according to the above association, since the same color does not appear at two or more places in the object sequence at the same time, it is possible to easily recognize that the main body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. As another pattern, (1, green), (2, blue), (3, red), (4, blue), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red), (8) , Blue), (9, green) can also be associated. That is, the large symbol object 610A (A1) and the large symbol object 610A (A2) have different color schemes, and the large symbol object 610A (A2) and the large symbol object 610A (A3) have different color schemes. Similarly, the large symbol object 610B (B1) and the large symbol object 610B (B2) have different color schemes, and the large symbol object 610B (B2) and the large symbol object 610B (B3) have different color schemes. The colors of (1, green) and (9, green) are the same, but different colors may be used for at least a plurality of identification information 1 to 9 that make a round, and conversely, the identification information 1 is intentionally supported. The first large symbol object and the last large symbol object corresponding to the identification information 9 may be made to have the same color so that the cycle can be easily recognized.

Therefore, a plurality of large symbol objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and large symbol objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) are arranged along a specific path (vertical direction) in the order in which the one-round identification information is switched, and the identification information is used. It is preferable to display the related colors so that the large symbol objects 610A and 610B adjacent to each other along the specific path have different color schemes. That is, the identification information and the color information are associated with each other so that the same color is not displayed consecutively in scrolling. As a result, not only the identification information but also the player can easily recognize that the object bodies of the large symbol object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3) are scrolling. it can.

This will be described according to (b1) to (b11) shown in FIGS. 38 and 39. Since the transition modes of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the small symbol object 615 are the same as the transition modes shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in FIG. 38 (b1), the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object string in which the identification information of "3" (A1), "2" (A2), and "1" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is an object string in which the identification information of "5" (B1), "4" (B2), and "3" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. The object sequence of the large symbol object 610A and the object sequence of the large symbol object 610B may be different strings of identification information as shown in the figure, or may be the same sequence of identification information. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed with the identification information "7" viewed from the front.

In the frame 102 shown in FIG. 38 (b2), the object sequence of the large symbol object 610A and the object sequence of the large symbol object 610B each maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 101. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the object body is rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a figure in a mode in which the identification information "7" is viewed from an angle.

In the frame 103 shown in FIG. 38 (b3), the object sequence of the large symbol object 610A and the object sequence of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frames 101 and 102, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the object body is rotated by 120 degrees, and the outer shape of the identification information "7" is inverted left and right and a figure in a mode viewed from an angle is displayed.

In the frame 104 shown in FIG. 38 (b4), the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object string in which the identification information of "4" (A1), "3" (A2), and "2" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "6" (B1), "5" (B2), and "4" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 105 shown in FIG. 38 (b5), the object sequence of the large symbol object 610A and the object sequence of the large symbol object 610B each maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 104. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the object body is rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a figure in a mode in which the identification information "8" is viewed from an angle.

In the frame 106 shown in FIG. 38 (b6), the object sequence of the large symbol object 610A and the object sequence of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frames 104 and 105, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the object body is rotated by 120 degrees, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is inverted left and right and a figure in a mode viewed from an angle is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in FIG. 38 (b7), the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object string in which the identification information of "5" (A1), "4" (A2), and "3" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "7" (B1), "6" (B2), and "5" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "9" and the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 108 shown in FIG. 38 (b8), the object sequence of the large symbol object 610A and the object sequence of the large symbol object 610B each maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 107. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the object body is rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a figure in a mode in which the identification information "9" is viewed from an angle.

In the frame 113 shown in FIG. 39 (b9), the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object string in which the identification information of "7" (A1), "6" (A2), and "5" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "9" (B1), "8" (B2), and "7" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "2" and the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 119 shown in FIG. 39 (b10), the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object string in which the identification information of "9" (A1), "8" (A2), and "7" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "2" (B1), "1" (B2), and "9" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "4" and the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 125 shown in FIG. 39 (b11), the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object string in which the identification information of "2" (A1), "1" (A2), and "9" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "4" (B1), "3" (B2), and "2" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "6" and the identification information is viewed from the front.

FIG. 40 is a table summarizing the contents shown in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 38 and 39. As shown in FIG. 40, the large symbol object 610A (FIG. 40: left (A1, A2, A3)) and the large symbol object 610B (FIG. 40: right (B1, B2, B3)) have the same identification in three frames. Maintaining information. Further, the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 40: middle) maintains the same identification information in one frame, but uses two frames to display a figure in which the identification information is rotated. There is. Therefore, in the large symbol object 610A, the large symbol object 610B, and the large symbol object 610C, the period until the identification information is switched is the same. As described above, the identification information of the small symbol object 615 is switched every frame.

The hold objects 633 and 633a shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 transition according to the “hold A” in FIG. 40, the period for displaying the same form is 6 frames (200 ms), and the period for changing the form is 24 frames. It is (800 ms). By the way, the effect control device 300 performs a look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) on the hold display (hold object 633,633a) as described above (FIG. 28: B1712), and for example, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the more conspicuous. The effect (color in this case) is changed to suggest the degree of expectation.

For example, “hold A” in FIG. 40 is a look-ahead notice effect when the degree of expectation is “small”, and the color of the hold objects 633 and 633a is also displayed in white, for example. “Hold B” in FIG. 40 is, for example, a look-ahead notice effect when the degree of expectation is “medium”, and is displayed in blue, for example. In the case of "hold B", the period for displaying the same form is 4 frames (133 ms), and the period for changing the form is 16 frames (533 ms). “Holding C” in FIG. 40 is, for example, a look-ahead notice effect when the degree of expectation is “high”, and is displayed in red, for example. In the case of "hold C", the period for displaying the same form is 2 frames (67 ms), and the period for changing the form is 8 frames (267 ms). Of course, the reserved objects 633 and 633a may change their morphology every time one frame is switched, and when the morphology repeatedly changes to "large", "medium", "small", "medium", and "large" as described above, the cycle thereof. Is for 4 frames (133 ms).

As described above, when "hold A", "hold B", and "hold C" are used to represent the expectation of a big hit, they can be used individually according to the expectation of each hold object 633,633a. it can.

Further, any one of the form changes (shape changes) of "hold A", "hold B", and "hold C" may be applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a, for example, during reach, "Hold B" or "Hold C" is applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a during the probability change state and the pseudo continuous effect is generated, and when these are completed, "Hold" is applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a. A ”may be applied. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of performing a pseudo-variation that fluctuates and temporarily stops the identification information a predetermined number of times in one variation display game.

If there are three pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, the form change of "hold A" is applied to all the reserved objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo-variations, and all in the second pseudo-variations. The form change of "hold B" may be applied to the hold objects 633 and 633a of the above, and the form change of "hold C" may be applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a in the third pseudo variation. As described above, it is also preferable to appropriately change the cycle in which the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes according to the game state.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a change mode (variation mode) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a, in which (a) shows a large change (variation) amplitude and (b) shows a medium change (variation) amplitude. In some cases, (c) indicates a case where the amplitude of change (fluctuation) is small. In the present embodiment, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed so that their widths change (fluctuation, deformation) in one direction (width direction, lateral direction), but the entire holding object is displayed toward the center (in the radial direction). It may be displayed so as to contract and expand.

As described above, the reserved objects 633 and 633a can change the cycle in which their morphology changes, but if the amplitude of change is the same when the cycle is long and when the cycle is short, it may give an unnatural impression. is there. Therefore, in the case of "hold A", a large amplitude is applied as shown in (a), and in the case of "hold B", a smaller amplitude than (a) is applied as shown in (b), and "hold" is applied. In the case of "C", it is preferable to apply an amplitude smaller than that of (b) as shown in (c) so that the periodic change of the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be performed more naturally.

[Variable display display mode of low-speed variable display at the start of the game]
FIG. 42 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the start of the variation display game. FIG. 43 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the start of the variation display game. FIG. 44 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the start of the variation display game, and the frame.

Here, the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the start of the variation display game will be described.

The variable display game is started when the reserved object 633a is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

When the variation display game is started, the small symbol object 615 switches the identification information every time one frame is switched, as in the case of high-speed variation. The reserved objects 633 and 633a switch their forms every time they switch 6 frames (4 frames, 2 frames, 1 frame may be used) regardless of the execution of the variable display game.

On the other hand, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C perform a preliminary operation, and then shift to low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation 1). In the preliminary operation, the large symbol object 610C has not yet rotated its axis, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C simultaneously move in the direction opposite to the scroll direction, that is, upward, and then start vertical scrolling. When the 610C returns to the initial position, it stays in place and starts rotational fluctuation. Further, during the preliminary operation, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are displayed larger than usual (for example, during low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation), and return to the original size when the preliminary operation is completed. It has become like. Further, during the preliminary operation, the periods during which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the identification information are the same.

In frame 1 shown in FIG. 42 (c1), each hold object 633 is moved to the right by the hold shift, the hold object 633a is displayed in the hold digestion area 640, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are displayed in the variable display area 610. Is displayed in the center (initial position) in the height direction.

Here, the large symbol object 610A displays the identification information "2", the large symbol object 610B displays the identification information "4", and the large symbol object 610C displays the identification information "7". Identification information may be displayed. Similarly to the above, two hold objects 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630a, the hold number "2" is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650, and the hold number display unit 660 of the special figure 2 holds. The number of pending numbers "0" is displayed.

Further, the form of the reserved object 633a is assumed to be switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "large" at the same time as the start of the variable display game, but the timing of starting the variable display game and the timing of switching the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are the same. It does not have to be. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 7 shown in FIG. 42 (c2), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have 300 pixels or 240 pixels in height positions during the preliminary operation from the initial position (for example, in pixel units (pixels) of the display device 41). ) Has moved. At this time, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C can be displayed in such a manner that they move in steps (for example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) at predetermined intervals for each frame, but every two frames, 3 It may be moved frame by frame. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "large" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 12 shown in FIG. 42 (c3), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to the highest position in the preliminary operation (for example, a position 550 pixels or 440 pixels higher than the initial position). The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their shape (shape "medium"). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "nine".

In the frame 13 shown in FIG. 42 (c4), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved one step (for example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) lower than the highest position in the preliminary operation. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "small". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 19 shown in FIG. 42 (c5), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved to a position seven steps (for example, 350 pixels or 280 pixels) lower than the highest position in the preliminary operation. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "small" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 23 shown in FIG. 42 (c6), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have each moved to the initial position, whereby the preliminary operation is completed. After that, the large symbol object 610C stops moving in the vertical direction from the frame 23 and starts the low-speed fluctuation display due to the rotation fluctuation. In addition, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B continue vertical movement and start low-speed fluctuation display by vertical scrolling. Further, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C return to their normal sizes. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their shape (shape "medium"). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "two".

In the frame 25 shown in FIG. 42 (c7), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are moved from the initial position to a position two steps lower, respectively. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information "7" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and displays a figure in which the identification information "7" is viewed from an angle. ing. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "large". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

Here, the large symbol object 610C has a display mode in which the axis rotates 30 degrees per frame (FIG. 44: rotation 1), and the identification information is rotated 360 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front. Suppose that is switched. Further, the large symbol object 610C displayed in (c7) represents a figure in which the identification information is rotated by less than 180 axes from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front, and is displayed in (c8) described later. The symbol object 610C represents a figure in which the identification information is rotated by an axis of 180 degrees or more and less than 360 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 31 shown in FIG. 42 (c8), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are moved from the initial position to a position eight steps lower, respectively. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information "7" is rotated by 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "7" is inverted left and right and a figure in a mode viewed from an angle is displayed. doing. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "large" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 35 shown in FIG. 43 (c9), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the uppermost stage, respectively. Then, the identification information of the large symbol object 610A is switched from "2" to "3", and the identification information of the large symbol object 610B is switched from "4" to "5". After that, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B move by two steps each time one frame is switched. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and "8" is viewed from the front. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their shape (shape "medium"). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "five".

In the frame 37 shown in FIG. 43 (c10), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at positions four steps lower than the uppermost step, respectively. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information "8" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and displays a figure in which the identification information "8" is viewed from an angle. ing. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "small". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 43 shown in FIG. 43 (c11), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are moved to positions five steps lower than the initial positions, respectively. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information "8" is rotated by 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is inverted left and right and a graphic in a mode viewed from an angle is displayed. doing. The form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is switched from the shape "small" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 47 shown in FIG. 43 (c12), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the uppermost stage, respectively. Then, the identification information of the large symbol object 610A is switched from "3" to "4", and the identification information of the large symbol object 610B is switched from "5" to "6". The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information is switched to "9" by rotating 360 axes from the posture of the frame 35 and the "9" is viewed from the front. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their shape (shape "medium"). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "eight".

After that, in the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display shifts in the order of medium speed fluctuation, high speed fluctuation, medium speed fluctuation, and low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 2) (described later). Although it has been explained that the small symbol object 615 is variablely displayed from the time of frame 1, the variable display may be started after the frame 23, that is, after the preparatory operation is completed.

FIG. 44 shows the number of frames in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 42 and 43, the identification information and position of the large symbol object 610A (FIG. 44: left symbol), 610B (FIG. 44: right symbol), and the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 44: right symbol). It is a table showing the relationship between the identification information of the middle symbol) and the position or rotation angle, the morphological change of the reserved objects 633 and 633a, and the identification information of the small symbol object 615.

Here, the "position" (number of steps) in FIG. 44 is the position in the height direction on the display device 41, and "0" indicates the initial position (center in the height direction). Further, "-1" is a position raised by one step upward with respect to the initial position. For example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels can be applied to the first step using the pixel unit (pixel) of the display device 41. On the contrary, "+1" indicates a position lowered by one step downward with respect to the initial position. Further, "rotation" is the rotation angle of the shaft rotation of the large symbol object 610C, and there are four patterns of "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" as described later. In addition, in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, "rotation 1" is applied.

As described above, the small symbol object 615 switches the identification information every time one frame is switched. The reserved objects 633 and 633a display the same form for 6 frames, and the form is periodically changed using 24 frames.

The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise by one step each time the frame is switched from the initial position of the frame 1, reach the highest position in the frame 12, and then descend by one step each time the frame is switched. The preliminary operation ends when the frame 23 returns to the initial position. At this time, the large symbol object 610C has not yet undergone rotation fluctuation.

After the frame 23, the low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation 1) is started, and the large symbol objects 610A and 610B continue to descend one step at a time each time the frame is switched to reach the lowest position in the frame 34. On the other hand, the large symbol object 610C starts the rotation fluctuation in a mode of rotating the axis by 30 degrees each time the frame is switched, and rotates the frame 34 by 330 degrees. Here, it is preferable that the large symbol object 610C does not stop the height position at the initial position after the start of the rotation fluctuation, but performs an overshoot operation that once passes through the initial position and returns to the initial position. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, the frame 24-26 moves down one step at a time, and then the frames 27-29 move up one step at a time to return to the initial position. As a result, the object feeling of the large symbol object 610C can be enhanced.

In the frame 35, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at a position 11 steps higher (uppermost step) than the initial position, and the identification information is switched. In addition, the large symbol object 610C also rotates 360 degrees, and the identification information is switched. After that, the large symbol object 610C rotates about 30 degrees every time the frame is switched, as in the previous time. On the other hand, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B descend by two steps each time the frame is switched.

In the frame 46, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B move to a position 11 steps lower (bottom step) than the initial position, and the large symbol object 610C rotates the axis by 330 degrees as in the previous time.

In the frame 47, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at a position 11 steps higher (uppermost step) than the initial position, and the identification information is switched. In addition, the large symbol object 610C also rotates 360 degrees, and the identification information is switched. As a result, the low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation 1) can be terminated, and the transition to medium-speed fluctuation and high-speed fluctuation can be performed.

In medium speed fluctuation, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B scroll vertically in 7 steps of -11, -7, -3, 0, +3, +7, +11 when the position shown in FIG. 44 is used as the first step. As the second step, vertical scrolling may be performed in five steps of -11, -6, 0, +6, and +11. Then, in the case of high-speed fluctuation, vertical scrolling may be performed in three steps of -11, 0, and +11.

In addition, the large symbol object 610C undergoes rotational fluctuation in seven stages of 0 degrees, 60 degrees, 120 degrees, 180 degrees, 240 degrees, 270 degrees, and 330 degrees as the first stage of medium speed fluctuation, and as the second stage. , 0 degrees, 72 degrees, 144 degrees, 216 degrees, 288 degrees, and rotation fluctuations are performed in 5 stages, and in high-speed fluctuations, rotation fluctuations are performed in 3 stages of 0 degrees, 120 degrees, and 240 degrees (FIG. 37 (b)). Just do it.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, the low-speed fluctuation display is performed from the frame 24 to the frame 46, and the display period at this time is 23 frames (766 ms). Further, the low-speed fluctuation display may be from frame 24 to frame 35, and in this case, the display period of the low-speed fluctuation display is 12 frames (400 ms). Further, it is preferable that the display period of the medium speed fluctuation display (first stage) is 462 ms (14 frames) and the display period of the medium speed fluctuation display (second stage) is 333 ms (10 frames). Further, it is preferable that the display period of the high-speed fluctuation display is lengthened according to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game, and in the normal gaming state, for example, 60 frames (2000 ms) are performed when there is no reach.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, the low-speed fluctuation is started from the frame 23 by omitting the preliminary operation (the large symbol object 610C does not perform the overshoot operation), and the medium-speed fluctuation is omitted from the frame 35 and thereafter. All you have to do is shift to high-speed fluctuations. Further, the display time of the high-speed fluctuation may be shorter than that in the case of playing the fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, and when there is no reach, it may be set to, for example, 9 frames (300 ms).

By the way, at the time of low speed fluctuation, the rotation fluctuation of the large symbol object 610C due to "rotation 1" expresses a state in which the large symbol object 610C always keeps rotating. However, by applying "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3", and "Rotation 4" in FIG. 44, the cycle for switching the identification information of the large symbol object 610C (after the large symbol object 610C starts to rotate, the axis rotates 360 degrees and stops. The large symbol object 610C can be stopped for a while with the large symbol object 610C viewed from the front without changing the cycle until the next rotation starts.

When "Rotation 2" of FIG. 44 is applied, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode of rotating the axis by 32.7 degrees (rounded off to the nearest whole number in FIG. 44) every time the frame is switched after the frame 23. The identification information is switched by rotating the axis 360 degrees on the frame 34, and the identification information is viewed in front, and the frame 35 also maintains the state in which the identification information is viewed in front. As a result, the large symbol object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed in front for one frame (33.3 ms).

When "Rotation 3" of FIG. 44 is applied, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode of rotating the axis by 36 degrees every time the frame is switched after the frame 23, and the identification information is switched by rotating the axis by 360 degrees at the frame 33. At the same time, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frame 34 and the frame 35 also maintain the state of being viewed from the front. As a result, the large symbol object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed in front for two frames (66.6 ms).

When "Rotation 4" of FIG. 44 is applied, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode of rotating the axis by 45 degrees each time the frame is switched after the frame 23, and the identification information is switched by rotating the axis by 360 degrees at the frame 31. At the same time, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the state of being viewed from the front is maintained even between the frame 31 and the frame 35. As a result, the large symbol object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed in front for 4 frames (133 ms).

The effect control device 300 has "rotation 1" (expectation: small) and "rotation 2" (expectation) for the large symbol object 610C according to the expectation of the big hit of the variable display game or the reserved object 633a being executed. : Medium), "Rotation 3" (Expectation: Large), "Rotation 4" (Expectation: Extra Large) may be applied. Further, the size of the large symbol object 610C may be changed depending on the rotation method. For example, "Rotation 1" (expectation degree: small) <"Rotation 2" (expectation degree: medium) <"Rotation 3" (expectation degree). : Large) <"Rotation 4" (Expectation: Extra large) may be displayed in larger order. At that time, the identification information may also be displayed so as to be larger than the reference size (for example, the size at the time of "rotation 1") when the posture is viewed from the front.

Further, the effect control device 300 applies "rotation 1" to the large symbol object 610C, for example, in the initial state (normal game state), and "rotation 2" during reach, probability change state, and pseudo continuous effect generation. , "Rotation 3", "Rotation 4" may be applied. Further, when the pseudo continuous effect occurs, the effect control device 300 performs "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" with respect to the large symbol object 610C in the order of repeating the pseudo variation. May be applied.

[Variation display display mode of low-speed fluctuation display at the end of the game]
FIG. 45 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the end of the variation display game (or freeze effect). is there. FIG. 46 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved object 633.633a at the end of the variation display game (or freeze effect). is there. FIG. 47 is a table showing the relationship between the variable mode or the variable mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the end (or freeze effect) of the variable display game, and the frame. Is.

Here, the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a before the end of the variation display game will be described.

Fluctuation display The low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation 2) at the end of the game is executed after passing through the high-speed fluctuation and the medium-speed fluctuation (in the order of the second stage and the first stage). In the low-speed fluctuation, the rotation fluctuation ends with the large symbol object 610C viewing the identification information in front, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C perform so-called shaking fluctuation (temporary stop display) in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C move up and down in the scroll direction.

When the identification information is switched, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the uppermost position (-11) as described above, and at this time, the large symbol object 610C is also displayed with the identification information viewed from the front. However, the variable display of the large symbol object 610C may be temporarily stopped until the large symbol objects 610A and 610B scroll downward to the same height as the large symbol object 610C.

Unlike the above, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are circular flat plate-shaped characters, and have a display mode in which they rotate around the same axis as the large symbol object 610C while maintaining the same form regardless of the execution of the variable display game. Be prepared. The small symbol object 615 switches the identification information every time the frame is switched until the variation display is completed. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ing.

In the frame 301 shown in FIG. 45 (d1), the large symbol object 610A and the large symbol object 610B display the same identification information “3” and have the same height as the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 47: position “0” (FIG. 47). It has moved to the position (position at the same height as the position “0”) of 44)). The large symbol object 610C is also displayed with the identification information "3" viewed from the front. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are all displayed with the character viewed from the front. The small symbol object 615 displays, for example, the identification information "one".

In the frame 307 shown in FIG. 45 (d2), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C descend by one step each time the frame 301 is switched from the frame 301 while displaying the same identification information "3" (for example, 25 per step). It has moved to the bottom (Fig. 47: position "+6") in the fluctuation of shaking (pixels or 20 pixels).

The reserved objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees by rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 301, and are displayed in a manner in which the character is viewed from the end face direction. Here, the rotation direction may be such that the left side faces the back and the right side faces the front from the rotation axis, or the rotation may be in the opposite direction. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 313 shown in FIG. 45 (d3), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise one step each time the frame 307 is switched from the frame 307 while displaying the same identification information "3", and start shaking fluctuation. It has moved to the initial position (FIG. 47: position "0"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a rotate 90 degrees by further rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of frame 307, and the character is inverted from (d1) to the left and right (character). Is displayed from the back). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 319 shown in FIG. 45 (d4), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise by one step each time the frame 313 is switched to one frame while displaying the same identification information "3", and become the highest in the shaking fluctuation. It has moved to the position (FIG. 47: position "-6"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a are rotated 90 degrees by further rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: FIG. 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of frame 319, and the character is displayed in a manner viewed from the end face direction. There is. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 325 shown in FIG. 45 (d5), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C descend by one step each time the frame 325 is switched from the frame 325 while displaying the same identification information "3", and the initial position of the shaking fluctuation ( FIG. 47: It has moved to the position “0”). The reserved objects 633 and 633a rotate 90 degrees by further rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of frame 319. As a result, the large symbol object 610C is rotated 360 degrees from the posture of the frame 301, and is displayed in such a manner that the character is viewed from the front in the same manner as in (d1). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 331 shown in FIG. 45 (d6), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C descend by one step each time the frame 325 is switched from the frame 325 while displaying the same identification information "3", and are the lowest in the shaking fluctuation. (Fig. 47: Position "+6"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a rotate 90 degrees by rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of frame 301, and the character is displayed in a mode viewed from the end face direction. .. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 337 shown in FIG. 45 (d7), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise one step each time the frame 331 is switched to one frame while displaying the same identification information “3”, and start shaking fluctuation. It has moved to the initial position (FIG. 47: position "0"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a rotate 90 degrees by further rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 331, and the character is inverted from (d5) to the left and right (character). Is displayed from the back). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 343 shown in FIG. 45 (d8), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise by one step each time the frame 337 is switched from the frame 337 while displaying the same identification information "3", and become the highest in the shaking fluctuation. It has moved to the position (FIG. 47: position "-6"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a are rotated 90 degrees by further rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of frame 319, and the character is displayed in a manner viewed from the end face direction. There is. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 349 shown in FIG. 46 (d9), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C descend by one step each time the frame 325 is switched from the frame 325 while displaying the same identification information "3", and the initial position of the shaking fluctuation ( FIG. 47: The shaking fluctuation ends by moving to the position “0”). The reserved objects 633 and 633a rotate 90 degrees by further rotating the axis by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 343. As a result, the large symbol object 610A is rotated 360 degrees from the posture of the frame 325 and displayed in a manner in which the character is viewed from the front. At this time, when the variable display game ends, the reserved object 633a disappears. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "4", and when the shaking fluctuation is stopped, the fluctuation display of the small symbol object 615 also ends. Then, for example, from frame 349 to frame 354, after maintaining the contents of frame 349, a big hit fanfare effect (FIG. 32: B2102) is performed.

In (d10) of FIG. 46, the character information of the identification information "333" and "Congratulations on the big hit" at the time of the big hit is displayed. When (d1) to (d9) of FIG. 46 are freeze effects, after that, the scrolling fluctuation or the rotation fluctuation is restarted without the holding object 633a disappearing, or the holding object 633a disappears and the next Move to a variable display game. In the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period), the periods in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the identification information are the same.

FIG. 47 shows the frame number in the screen transition diagram of FIGS. 45 and 46, the positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C (FIG. 47: large symbol), the rotation angle of the axis rotation of the reserved objects 633 and 633a, and the small symbol object. It is a table showing the relationship of the identification information of 615.

Although the description is omitted in the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (the above-mentioned stop display time) of FIGS. 46 and 47, the effect control device 300 has a preliminary operation display shown in FIG. 42. As shown above, the size of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C may be displayed so as to be larger than the size in the high-speed fluctuation display period. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (stop display time), and shift from the high-speed fluctuation display to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period). The variable display mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C can be easily recognized.

As shown in FIG. 47, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C start swinging fluctuation from the frame 301 and make one round trip at the frame 325. Therefore, the shaking period of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is 24 frames. Further, the reserved objects 633 and 633a (rotated by "rotation 1") are also rotated 360 degrees by the frame 325 with reference to the frame 301. Therefore, the rotation period of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is also 24 frames (800 ms). The identification information of the small symbol object 615 (FIG. 47: small symbol) is switched every time one frame is switched, but when the variable display of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is stopped at the frame 349, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 is also displayed. finish.

Further, other rotation modes can be applied to the reserved objects 633 and 633a. For example, when "Rotation 2" in FIG. 47 is applied, the display is displayed in a mode in which the axis rotates 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched, so that the period is twice the shaking period of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. The axis can be rotated.

Further, in the reserved objects 633 and 633a, a display mode in which the rotation of the predetermined time axis is stopped while the character is viewed from the front is also possible. For example, when "Rotation 3" is applied, the character is rotated by 18 degrees every time the frame is switched with reference to the state in which the character is viewed from the front by the frame 301, and the character is rotated by 360 degrees by the blame 321 to be viewed from the front again. However, the display mode is maintained in the frame 322-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for 4 frames (133 ms) of the frames 321-324.

Further, when "Rotation 3" is applied, the display is such that the character is rotated by 30 degrees every time the frame is switched with reference to the state in which the character is viewed from the front by the frame 301, and the character is rotated by 360 degrees by the frame 313 to be viewed from the front. Although it becomes an aspect, the display aspect is maintained in the frame 314-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for 12 frames (400 ms) of the frames 313-324.

Here, for example, "Rotation 1", "Rotation 3", and "Rotation 4" can be applied as representing the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure variation display game related to the reserved objects 633 and 633a. It can be assigned as "Rotation 1" (low expectation), "Rotation 3" (medium expectation), and "Rotation 4" (high expectation). Of course, the color of the reserved objects 633 and 633a may be changed according to the degree of expectation in the same manner as described above. Further, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be individually used according to the degree of expectation related to each of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

It is also preferable to display the reserved objects 633 and 633a larger as the ratio of the time for frontal viewing of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is larger. For example, the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the time of "rotation 1" < It may be displayed so that the size of the reserved object 633,633a at the time of "rotation 3" <the size of the reserved object 633,633a at the time of "rotation 4". Further, the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is larger than the reference size (for example, the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the time of "rotation 1") only when the character of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is viewed from the front. May be displayed so as to be large.

Further, for example, any one of "Rotation 3" and "Rotation 4" may be applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a, and for example, all hold during reach, probability change state, and pseudo continuous effect generation. You may apply "Rotation 3" or "Rotation 4" to objects 633,633a and then apply "Rotation 1" to all reserved objects 633,633a when they are finished.

If there are three pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, "Rotation 1" is applied to all the reserved objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo-variation, and all the reserved objects in the second pseudo-variation. "Rotation 3" may be applied to 633,633a, and "Rotation 4" may be applied to all reserved objects 633,633a in the third pseudo-variation. As described above, the time for the character of the reserved objects 633 and 633a to be viewed from the front according to the game state, that is, the time until the reserved objects 633 and 633a start to rotate, stop the character in the front view, and start to rotate again. It is also preferable to appropriately change the ratio of the time for viewing the character from the front. Further, the size of the hold object 633 and 633a is set to, for example, the hold object 633 and 633a to which "rotation 1" is applied <the hold object 633 and 633a to which "rotation 3" is applied <the hold object 633 to which "rotation 4" is applied. , 633a may be displayed in larger order.

In FIG. 47, one cycle of "rotation 1" to "rotation 4" may be controlled at the same time (48 frames). The effect control device 300 can manage 48 frames in association with the control pointers 0 to 47. In this case, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" have a rotation mode of two rotations in 48 frames, and "rotation 2" has a rotation mode of one rotation in 48 frames. As a result, even if the effect control device 300 transitions the rotation mode of one reserved object 633,633a at a predetermined timing (for example, transitions from "rotation 2" to "rotation 3"), the rotation after the transition is performed. Starting from the same control pointer value as the other pending objects 633,633a, the rotations can be kept in sync with all the pending objects 633,633a. Further, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the hold object 633, 633a can be changed based on the cycle of "rotation 2" in FIG. 47, that is, the cycle in which the change mode of the hold object 633, 633a makes a round when 48 frames are switched. it can. It is assumed that the reserved object 633 is viewed in front of the frame 301 in FIG. 47 and starts to rotate around the frame 302. At this time, "Rotation 3'" is newly provided, and in "Rotation 3'", the hold object 633 and 633a is axially rotated 9 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) for each frame, and is held at the frame 340. The object 633 and 633a can be rotated once and viewed in front, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be rotated from the frame 341 to the frame 349 at rest. Further, "Rotation 4'" is newly provided, and in "Rotation 4'", the reserved objects 633 and 633a rotate about 15 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) for each frame, and are held at the frame 325. The object 633 and 633a can be rotated once and viewed in front, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be rotated from the frame 326 to the frame 349 in a stationary manner. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") rotates at twice the rotation speed as in the case of "rotation 2" by extracting every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, "Rotation 1'", "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3'", and "Rotation 4'" have different rotation modes, but have the same rotation period (variable period) (for "Rotation 1'"). Double cycle). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is changed, the rotation mode of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is changed between "rotation 1'" and "rotation 4'" according to the game state, the effect stage, and the like. Even when it is changed arbitrarily, it is possible to easily control the display of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

FIG. 48 is a transition diagram showing a variation mode or a variation mode (modification example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a at the end of the variation display game (or freeze effect). is there. In FIG. 48, the reserved objects 633 and 633a do not rotate by themselves. However, the reserved objects 633 and 633a include decorative objects 633b that orbit around the reserved objects 633 and 633a. When "Rotation 1" of FIG. 47 is applied, for example, the decorative object 633b is arranged in one frame at the highest position on the peripheral edge (outer shape) of the character of the reserved objects 633 and 633a in the frame 301 (frame 325). Each time it is switched, it has a display mode in which the character moves along the peripheral edge (outer shape) of the character in a mode of rotating 15 degrees around the center of the character as a rotation axis. As the decorative object 633b, for example, it is preferable to apply an object having the shape of the sun or a star and having a higher brightness than the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

In FIG. 48, the transitions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, the reserved objects 633, 633a, and the decorative objects 633b are described following (d5) to (d10) of FIGS. 45 and 46. Therefore, the description of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the like will be omitted as appropriate.

In the frame 325 shown in FIG. 48 (d5), the reserved objects 633 and 633a are stationary with the character viewed from the front, and do not move until the reserved objects 633a are digested. The decorative object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

In the frame 331 shown in FIG. 48 (d6), the decorative object 633b rotates clockwise (even counterclockwise) along the peripheral edge of the character in a manner of rotating 15 degrees around the center of the character as the rotation axis each time the frame is switched. It is arranged at a position (left cheek) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a manner of moving to (good) and rotating 90 degrees in the circumferential direction from the position (head) related to the frame 325.

In the frame 337 shown in FIG. 48 (d7), the decorative object 633b is arranged at a position (jaw) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a manner of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the position (left cheek) related to the frame 331. Has been done.

In the frame 343 shown in FIG. 48 (d8), the decorative object 633b is arranged at a position (right cheek) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a manner of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the position (jaw) related to the frame 337. Has been done.

In the frame 349 shown in FIG. 48 (d9), the decorative object 633b is arranged at a position (head) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a manner of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the position (right cheek) related to the frame 337. Then, the decorative object 633b goes around the periphery of the character once. At this time, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C also perform one cycle of shaking fluctuation with reference to the frame 325. After that, in (d10) of FIG. 48, when the reserved object 633a disappears, the decorative object 633b that decorates it also disappears.

As with the reserved objects 633 and 633a, "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be applied to the decorative object 633b according to the game state.

When "Rotation 2" is applied, the decorative object 633b orbits the periphery of the character (holding object 633, 633a) at a cycle twice the shaking cycle.

When "Rotation 3" is applied, the period from when the decorative object 633b starts to circulate around the character's periphery to when it stops at the character's head and starts to circulate again is "Rotation 1", and the decorative object 633b circulates around the character's periphery. The display mode is the same as the orbiting period, but the decorative object 633b stops at the head of the character for 4 frames (133 ms).

When "Rotation 4" is applied, the period from when the decorative object 633b starts to circulate around the character's periphery to when it stops at the character's head and starts to circulate again is "Rotation 1", and the decorative object 633b circulates around the character's periphery. The display mode is the same as the orbiting period, but the decorative object 633b stops at the head of the character for 12 frames (400 ms).

Further, the size of the decorative object 633b is displayed in the order of, for example, the decorative object 633b to which "rotation 1" is applied <the decorative object 633b to which "rotation 3" is applied <the decorative object 633b to which "rotation 4" is applied. May be good.

Although the decorative object 633b has been described as being arranged on the peripheral edge of the reserved object 633 and 633a and rotating about the reserved object 633 and 633a by moving along the peripheral edge, the inside or outside of the peripheral edge is described. You may arrange it in the same way and rotate it in the same way.

Similar to the above-mentioned reserved objects 633 and 633a, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b is based on the cycle of "rotation 2" in FIG. 47, that is, the cycle in which the decoration object 633b rotates 360 degrees around the character when 48 frames are switched. (Variable mode) can be changed. Consider the case where the decorative object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character in the frame 301 of FIG. 47. At this time, in "Rotation 3'", the decorative object 633b rotates 9 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) around the character for each frame, and in the frame 340, the decorative object 633b goes around the character. It can be arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character, and the decorative object 633b can be rotated from frame 341 to frame 349 to be stationary at the arrangement position. Further, in "Rotation 4'", the decorative object 633b rotates 15 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) around the character for each frame, and in the frame 325, the decorative object 633b goes around the character. It can be arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character, and the decorative object 633b can be rotated from the frame 326 to the frame 349 to be stationary at the arrangement position. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") rotates at twice the rotation speed as in the case of "rotation 2" by extracting every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, "Rotation 1'", "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3'", and "Rotation 4'" have different rotation modes, but have the same rotation period (variable period) (for "Rotation 1'"). Double cycle). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the decoration object 633b is changed, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b is arbitrarily changed between "rotation 1'" and "rotation 4'" according to the game state, the production stage, and the like. Even when the decoration object 633b is displayed, the control for displaying the decorative object 633b can be easily performed.

[Second modification of the fluctuation mode during high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 49 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display. .. FIG. 50 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display. .. In the second modification, the case where the time (number of frames) when the character is viewed from the front changes according to the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a will be described. Although FIGS. 49 and 50 take high-speed fluctuations as an example, they can also be applied to low-speed fluctuations.

The reserved objects 633 and 633a are circular flat plate-shaped characters and have an axially rotating display mode as in the cases shown in FIGS. 45 and 46. For example, the front side of the reserved objects 633 and 633a appears. At that stage, the size of the reserved object 633 and 633a is enlarged, and when the character of the reserved object 633 and 633a is viewed from the front, the reserved object 633 and 633a is not updated for several frames in the effect display editing process shown in FIG. After that, it is possible to perform a display mode in which the update is restarted and the size is returned to the original size.

In the frame 113 of (a9) of FIG. 49 (the same timing as (a9) of FIG. 34), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B each display the identification information "2" at the uppermost position, and the large symbol object 610C displays the identification information "2". Although the identification information "2" is displayed in a front view in the central portion, the identification information may be different from each other in the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. At this time, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in such a manner that the character is viewed from the end face direction. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one". The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. (Same below).

In the frame 119 of FIG. 49 (a10), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “4” at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the axis rotates 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched (FIG. 47: rotation 2), and the character is tilted on the back surface by rotating the character 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 113. It is displayed in a manner viewed from the arrangement (arrangement in which the left side comes to the front from the rotation axis). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 125 of FIG. 49 (a11), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “6” at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the back surface of the character is viewed from the front by rotating the reserved objects by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 119 in the same manner as described above. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 131 of FIG. 49 (a12), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “8” at the same positions as described above. Similarly, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the character is viewed from the back surface obliquely (arrangement in which the right side comes to the front from the rotation axis) by rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 125. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 137 of FIG. 49 (a13), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “1” at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 125 in the same manner as described above. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven". After that, the expansion effect of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is started.

In the frame 143 of FIG. 49 (a14), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “3” at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are enlarged and displayed, and the surface of the character is displayed diagonally (arrangement in which the left side comes to the front from the rotation axis) by rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 137 as described above. Has been done. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 149 of FIG. 49 (a15), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “5” at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are enlarged and displayed, and are displayed in a front view of the surface of the character by rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 143 in the same manner as described above. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one". The reserved objects 633 and 633a may be gradually expanded from frame 137 to frame 149 every time one frame is switched. Further, it may be displayed so as to have the same size (vertical size) as the reserved objects 633 and 633a shown in the frame 149 at the stage of the frame 138.

In the frame 155 of FIG. 49 (a16), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “7” at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are stopped from being updated from the frame 149, and maintain the display in which the surface of the character is viewed from the front. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 161 of FIG. 50 (a17), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “9” at the same positions as described above. The pending objects 633 and 633a are continuously stopped from updating from the frame 155 and maintain the display in the front view of the character's surface. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 167 of FIG. 50 (a18), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information "1" at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in such a manner that the surface of the character is viewed diagonally (arrangement in which the right side comes to the front from the rotation axis) by resuming the update from the frame 161 and rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 161. ing. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 173 of FIG. 50 (a19), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information "3" at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 167. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "seven". At frame 173, the enlargement effect of the reserved objects 633 and 633a ends and returns to the original size. At that time, the size may be gradually reduced each time the frame 161 is switched to one frame, or the same size (vertical size) is maintained from the frame 161 to the frame 172 to the original size in the frame 173. You may try to put it back.

In the frame 179 of FIG. 50 (a20), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information "5" at the same positions as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the surface of the character is viewed from an angle (arrangement in which the left side comes to the front from the rotation axis) by rotating the character by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 173, but it is enlarged. There is nothing. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "four".

At the timing when the identification information of the large symbol object 610C is viewed from the front during high-speed fluctuation, the large symbol object 610C is not updated for several frames in the effect display editing process shown in FIG. 36, and then the update is restarted. It is also possible to perform a pause effect. At that time, the size of the large symbol object 610C may be increased in proportion to the period (number of frames) for stopping the large symbol object 610C, and the size may be returned to the original size after the pause effect is completed. Further, in synchronization with the large symbol object 610C, it is also possible to perform a pause effect on the small symbol object 615 by performing the effect editing process shown in FIG. 36 without updating the identification information for several frames.

In the second modification, the enlargement effect may not be performed on the hold object 633, and the enlargement effect may be performed only on the hold object 633a corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game being executed. At this time, the rectangular frame indicating the reserved digestion area 640 may be displayed so that the reserved object 633a protrudes from the frame without enlarging the effect. Further, the hold object 633 can be displayed not only on the special figure 1 hold display unit 660 (hold display unit 630a) but also on the special figure 2 hold display unit (hold display unit 630b). Therefore, if there is a hold object 633 in the special figure 2 hold display unit, the hold object 633 may be similarly enlarged. In this case, regardless of whether the hold object 633a is the hold object 633 in the special figure 1 hold display part and the hold object 633 in the special figure 2 hold display part, the enlargement effect is applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a. It may be configured to perform. Further, when the hold object 633a is related to the hold object 633 that was in the special figure 1 hold display unit, the hold object 633a and the hold object displayed in the special figure 1 hold display unit may be enlarged. Good. Similarly, when the hold object 633a relates to the hold object 633 that was in the special figure 2 hold display unit, the hold object 633a and the hold object displayed in the special figure 2 hold display unit are enlarged. But it may be.

[Third variant of high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 51 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (third modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display. .. FIG. 52 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (third modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a during the high-speed variation display. ..

In the third modification, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B perform rotational fluctuations, and the large symbol objects 610C perform vertical scroll fluctuations, but this configuration can also be applied to low-speed fluctuation display. Note that (e1) to (e11) in FIGS. 51 and 52 correspond to (a1) to (a11) in FIGS. 33 and 34, and the transition modes of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the small symbol object 615 are shown in FIG. 33, since it is the same as the transition mode shown in FIG. 34, these description will be omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in FIG. 51 (e1), the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the upper center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “7”. The large symbol object 610A is displayed in a state where the identification information "7" is viewed from the front at a position on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction. The large symbol object 610B is displayed in a state where the identification information "7" is viewed from the front at a position on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction.

In the frame 102 shown in FIG. 51 (e2), the large symbol object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “7”, but moves in the horizontal direction as compared with the frame 101. Not (the same applies thereafter).

The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees in the axial direction from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the identification information "7" is viewed from an angle. Is displayed. Here, the direction of axis rotation is the direction in which the left side moves to the back and the right side moves to the front from the rotation axis, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B do not move in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction as compared with the frame 101 (the same applies hereinafter).

In the frame 103 shown in FIG. 51 (e3), the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the lower center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “7”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.

In the frame 104 shown in FIG. 51 (e4), the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information "7" disappears, and the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information "8" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. The object. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed in front and the back surface is viewed in front, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the back surface. it's shown.

In the frame 105 shown in FIG. 51 (e5), the large symbol object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “8”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the figures in the form in which the identification information "8" is viewed from an angle are displayed. doing.

In the frame 106 shown in FIG. 51 (e6), the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the lower center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “8”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is inverted left and right and viewed from an angle. The figure of the above aspect is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in FIG. 51 (e7), the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “8” disappears, and the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “9” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. The object. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a manner in which the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed in front and the surface is viewed in front, and the identification information "9" is displayed on the surface. doing.

In the frame 108 shown in FIG. 51 (e8), the large symbol object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “9”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and the figure in which the identification information "9" is viewed from an angle is displayed. ing.

In the frame 113 shown in FIG. 52 (e9), a large symbol object 610C for displaying the identification information “2” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surface.

In the frame 119 shown in FIG. 52 (e10), a large symbol object 610C for displaying the identification information “4” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surface.

In the frame 125 shown in FIG. 52 (e11), a large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “6” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the large symbol object 610C moves in the order of the upper center, the central portion, and the lower center of the display device 41 in a state of having the same identification information (same form) using three frames. Is displayed. Further, in the large symbol objects 610A and 610B, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed in only one frame.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the variable mode (variable display mode) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C can be changed according to the game state. For example, at the start of the normal game state, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are set to vertical scroll fluctuations, and the large symbol objects 610C are set to rotational fluctuations. It is also possible to change the large symbol objects 610A and 610B to rotational fluctuations and the large symbol objects 610C to vertical scroll fluctuations when a pseudo continuous effect occurs. Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous effect, a large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) that performs the above-mentioned rotation variation and a large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) that performs the vertical scroll variation during the pseudo variation after the temporary stop of the pseudo variation. It is also possible to alternately switch the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B).

It is also possible to change the combination of fluctuation modes according to the expected degree of jackpot of the special figure variation display game or the reserved object 633a being executed, and when the degree of expectation is "small", the large symbol object 610A, Set 610B to vertical scroll variation and large symbol object 610C to rotational variation. When the degree of expectation is "medium", the large symbol object 610A (or 610B) is set to vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C and the large symbol object 610B (or large symbol object 610A) are set to rotational variation. When the degree of expectation is "Large", it is possible to make changes such as setting the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C to rotation fluctuations.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variablely displaying a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C to perform a variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is obtained. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) And the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B).
The variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is the display device 41. , Along with the variation display of a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the variation display of the small symbol object 615 is performed, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same mode during the high-speed variation display period. The period (T2) to be displayed is shorter than the period (T1) in which the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is continuously displayed in the same mode, and the small symbol object 615 is displayed in the same mode. The period (S1) for continuously displaying the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is made equal to the period (T2) for continuously displaying the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the variation display game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) is a first large symbol object (for example, a large symbol object) under predetermined conditions (for example, when the effect stage changes or when the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped). 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) are exchanged in display position and / or display number.

As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced without adding a new element of the effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) includes the first identification information (identification information), and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is second. The display control means (effect control device 300) is provided with identification information (identification information), and the display control means (effect control device 300) is a first large symbol object (for example, large) in a variable display mode that scrolls along a specific path provided on the screen of the display device 41. The symbol objects 610A and 610B) are variablely displayed, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is variablely displayed in a variable display mode that rotates at a predetermined position.

As a result, even if the variable display modes having different variable display modes are simultaneously performed, the variable display modes of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the variable display game can be easily recognized.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in a stepwise axially rotated manner, and displays the second identification information (identification information). ) Is displayed so that the front surface or the back surface is alternately viewed from the front, and the second identification information (identification information) is switched each time the front surface and / or the back surface is viewed from the front. The object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is displayed in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the second identification information (identification information) due to the rotation fluctuation.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) moves the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) from the base end of the specific route toward the end of the specific route and disappears. After the first identification information (identification information) is switched, the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is moved from the base end to the end and disappears repeatedly. The first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is scrolled.

As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the first identification information (identification information) by vertical scrolling (one-way scrolling).

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) has a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) along a specific path in the order in which the first identification information (identification information) is switched. A plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects) (for example, large symbol objects) are displayed side by side and a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same mode for the same period. Objects 610A, 610B) are scrolled.

Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the first identification information (identification information) by the vertical scroll (one-way scroll) in which a plurality of the first identification information (identification information) are arranged at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the variable display game in the specific game state (for example, the time saving state) in which the specific game can be executed after the end of the special game state is the variable display game in the normal game state in which the specific game cannot be executed. Is shorter than the display time of.

As a result, the specific game state (for example, the time saving state) can be reliably performed, and the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the specific game state can be easily recognized.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variablely displaying a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C to perform a variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is obtained. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) And the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B). In the display device 41, the display device 41 displays the fluctuations of the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C, and also displays the fluctuations of the small symbol objects 615. ), The second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same mode, and the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is continuously displayed in the same mode. Equal to the display period, and in the specific display period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period) other than the predetermined period in the variable display game, the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) ) Is continuously displayed in the same mode as shorter than the period in which the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is continuously displayed in the same mode, and the small symbol object 615 is displayed in the same mode. The period for which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed is made equal to the period for which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner.

With the above configuration, the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in the variation display game can be easily recognized, and the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B) in a predetermined period can be easily recognized. By making the switching cycles of the identification information of the two large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol object 610C) equal to each other, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the variable display, thereby improving the interest.

In the first embodiment, the specific display period includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is faster than the predetermined period, and the predetermined period includes a preliminary operation display period for displaying the preliminary movement at the start of the fluctuation display game. The first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) includes the first identification information (identification information), and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) has the second identification information (identification). Information) is provided, and the display control means (effect control device 300) identifies the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) on the screen of the display device 41 during the high-speed fluctuation display period. The first identification information (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner (vertical scroll) along the route, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is displayed in a stepwise axial rotation mode. Then, the front surface or the back surface on which the second identification information (identification information) is displayed is displayed so as to be alternately viewed from the front, and the second identification information (identification) is displayed each time the front surface and / or the back surface is viewed from the front. Information) is variablely displayed in a switching mode (rotational fluctuation), and during the preliminary operation display period, the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is displayed while maintaining the first identification information (identification information). The display position of one large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) is changed from the initial position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) to the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610A, 610B). The 610B) moves a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction, and then returns to the initial position of the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B). , Large symbol object 610C), while maintaining the second identification information (identification information), the display position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is set to the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). The first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) moves a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction from the initial position of, and then the initial position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). The first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610A) is displayed in a variable manner in the manner of returning to. , 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) are moved in synchronization with each other.

As a result, even if the variation display mode of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) are different, the same operation is performed in the preliminary operation. It is possible to naturally perform the effect at the start of the variable display game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays the preliminary operation of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). The size in the period is made larger than the size in the high-speed fluctuation display period of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C).

As a result, attention can be drawn to the preliminary movement, and the size of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the high-speed fluctuation display can be made appropriately smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation to make it easier to see. This makes it easier to recognize the scroll, which makes it possible to easily recognize the variable display of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. Further, in the high-speed fluctuation display, the scroll speed can be enhanced by making the sizes of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C smaller than the sizes at the time of the preliminary fluctuation.

Here, the size of the large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be identified even if the size of the identification information is defined as the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) as it is. The entire size including the object body (frame, character, etc.) on which the information is displayed may be defined as the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). Therefore, for example, even if the size of the identification information does not differ between the preliminary operation display period and the high-speed fluctuation display period, the object body (frame, character) is displayed together with the identification information in the preliminary operation display period, and the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. Even when the object body (frame, character) disappears and only the identification information is displayed during the period (and the low-speed fluctuation display period), the size of the large symbol object in the preliminary operation display period is larger than that of the high-speed fluctuation display period. It can be regarded as large.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) and the second large symbol object (for example, large) immediately after the end of the preliminary operation display period. A mode in which the display position of the symbol object 610C) vibrates around the initial position of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) and converges to the initial position of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). Variable display with.

As a result, the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be physically operated.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined period includes the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) performed after the specific display period, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is the first major symbol in the temporary stop display period. The display position of the object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C), the display position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol The display position of the object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is variablely displayed in such a manner that the display position changes periodically in the same direction in synchronization with each other.

As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the player is in a temporary stop state immediately before the end of the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means for variablely displaying a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) to play a variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is special. In the case of a result, in the game machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the start memory is stored as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the start area (for example, the start winning opening 36). A memorable start storage means (game control device 100) is provided, and a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) include a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). The variable display game includes a second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) whose variation mode is different from that of the large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B)), and the variable display game starts from the period immediately after the start of the variable display game. The display control means (effect control device 300) includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is fast, and the display control means (effect control device 300) uses the display device 41 to display a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbols). Along with the variation display of the objects 610A, 610B, 610C), the variation display of the small symbol object 615 and the display of the reserved objects 633 and 633a corresponding to the start memory are performed, and the second large symbol object (the second large symbol object ( For example, a period (T2) in which the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same mode, and a period (T1) in which the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same mode. The period (S1) in which the small symbol object 615 is continuously displayed in the same mode is shortened to the period (T2) in which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same mode. The period (H1) in which the reserved objects 633 and 633a are continuously displayed in the same mode is equal to the period (H1) in which the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is continuously displayed in the same mode (for example). Make it longer than T1).

As a result, the player naturally directs his / her line of sight to the person who is moving at high speed, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C when the object is fluctuating at high speed. Further, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are stopped (including the temporarily stopped state), the line of sight can be directed to the variably displayed reserved objects 633 and 633a. As described above, the interest of the game can be improved by appropriately producing the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the variable display game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) variably displays the reserved objects 633 and 633a in such a manner that the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes periodically, and the large symbol objects 610A and 610B, The 610C is variablely displayed in such a manner that the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change periodically at the time of temporary stop, and the period (P3) at which the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes is set at the time of temporary stop. Make the display position of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C equal to (synchronize with) the period of change.

As a result, it becomes possible to perform a coordinated production in which the variable display cycle (P3) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the variable cycle of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C at the time of temporary stop are aligned (synchronized), and the interest of the game is improved. At the same time, the unnaturalness caused by asynchronous can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) variably displays the reserved objects 633 and 633a in such a manner that the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes periodically, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a. The period in which the form changes can be shortened when the expectation that the result of the variable display game relating to the reserved objects 633 and 633a will be a special result is high.

As a result, it is possible to visually grasp the difference in the expected degree of holding of the holding objects 633 and 633a.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) reduces the amplitude when the form of the reserved object 633, 633a changes as the period in which the form of the reserved object 633, 633a changes becomes shorter.

This makes it possible to eliminate the unnatural relationship between the period in which the morphology of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes and the amplitude.

In the first embodiment, the reserved object 633 and 633a includes a decorative object 633b that is displayed in a mode of orbiting along the outer shape of the reserved object 633 and 633a, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is the reserved object 633. , 633a is defined as a cycle in which the decorative object 633b orbits the outer shape of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

As a result, it is not necessary to move the main body (character) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a in the variable display, so that the variable display (variable display) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be easily performed.

In the first embodiment, the reserved object 633 and 633a includes the decorative object 633b, and the display control means (effect control device 300) rotates the reserved object 633 and 633a in such a manner that the position of the decorative object 633b orbits. The period during which the display is displayed and the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes is defined as the period during which the decorative object 633b orbits.

As a result, it is not necessary to move the main body (character) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a in the variable display, so that the variable display (variable display) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variablely displaying a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C to perform a variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is obtained. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) And the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B). 300) displays the variation of the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the variation display of the small symbol object 615 on the display device 41, and determines the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). It can be displayed in a variable manner in a mode of axial rotation at a position (rotational fluctuation), and can be displayed in a predetermined period with the identification information included in the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) viewed from the front. The predetermined period can be changed based on the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C).

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). In this way, the interest can be improved by appropriately producing the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the variable display game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player which gaming state is occurring without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) when the identification information is viewed from the front. It is made larger than the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) when it does not become.

As a result, the identification information displayed on the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be emphasized.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) uses the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) after the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) starts rotating the axis. ) Is viewed in front of the user, the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is paused for a predetermined period, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is paused. The ratio occupied by the predetermined period in the cycle from the start of the shaft rotation to the end of the pause is changed based on the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C).

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). Further, since the axis rotation cycle of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) does not change regardless of a predetermined period, it is the same as the axis rotation cycle of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). The synchronization with the scroll cycle of the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) becomes easy, and a more natural variation display can be performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player. In the game machine 10 capable of generating the above, the starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the starting memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area (starting winning opening 36, etc.) is provided. The display control means (effect control device 300) displays the hold objects 633 and 633a corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41, rotates the hold objects 633 and 633a, and rotates the hold object 633 and 633a at a specific rotation angle (character is viewed from the front). The holding object 633 and 633a are paused for a period of time in which the holding object 633 and 633a are paused by variably displaying the rotation angle of the game or any other rotation angle such as a rotation angle at which the character's characteristics can be recognized. It can be changed based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image related to a specific rotation angle of the reserved objects 633 and 633a (rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or a rotation angle other than that at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized) can be improved. It can be increased, and the pause time is changed according to the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is not monotonous, and the player pays close attention to it, which can improve the interest.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player which gaming state is occurring without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) variablely displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C on the display device 41 to execute a variable display game, and at the time of temporary stop, a plurality of display control means (effect control device 300). The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are displayed in a variable manner in such a manner that the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change periodically. Is synchronized with the cycle in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change at the time of temporary stop.

As a result, the vibration of the display position of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C and the rotation of the reserved objects 633 and 633a can be harmonized to produce a natural effect.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) determines the ratio of the pause in the cycle from the start of the axis rotation of the hold object 633 and 633a to the end of the pause in the hold object 633 and 633. It is changed based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image related to a specific rotation angle of the reserved objects 633 and 633a (rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or a rotation angle other than that at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized) can be improved. Can be enhanced. Further, since the rotation cycle including the pause of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is invariant, it is easy to synchronize the rotation cycle of the reserved objects 633 and 633a with the scroll cycle or the rotation cycle of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C. It becomes possible to perform a more natural production.

According to the first embodiment, a display control means (effect control device 300) that variablely displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C on the display device 41 to play a variable display game, and a game ball with a predetermined firing cycle. In the game machine 10 which is provided with a ball launching device for launching in, and can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a starting area (for example, a starting winning opening 36). A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as an execution right of a variable display game based on the passage of a game ball to the object is provided, and a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are first large symbol objects. (For example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B). The variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is a display device. In 41, the variation display of the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the variation display of the small symbol object 615 are performed, and the hold objects 633 and 633a corresponding to the start storage are displayed on the display device 41 and the hold objects 633 and 3 are displayed. The first large symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a mode in which the form of the 633a changes periodically, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same mode in the high-speed variable display period. The period during which the objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner is shorter than the period during which the small symbol objects 615 are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the period during which the small symbol objects 615 are continuously displayed is set as the second large symbol object (for example, The period during which the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner is equal to the period during which the reserved objects 633 and 633a are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the period during which the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is continuously displayed is set. ) Is made longer than the period in which the objects are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the cycle in which the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is changed is made longer than the firing cycle of the game ball.

The launch of a game ball by the ball launcher is experienced by the player by the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the player can relax and enjoy the game relaxedly by making the cycle in which the form of the reserved objects 633 and 633a changes (sway cycle P3) slower than the firing cycle. it can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A and 610B) to play a variable display game, and the variable display game. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, a symbol object (for example, large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) Is variablely displayed by a variable display mode that includes identification information and scrolls along a specific path (vertical path) provided on the screen of the display device 41, and the variable display game is immediately after the start of the variable display game. The display control means (effect control device 300) includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the symbol object is faster than the period, and the display control means (effect control device 300) uses the symbol object (for example, large symbol 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B) in the high-speed fluctuation display period. (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific path in the order in which the identification information of one round is switched, and the colors associated with the identification information are different from each other among the large symbol objects adjacent to each other. As described above, the symbol object related to the identification information in a round is displayed.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the object body of the large symbol object (for example, large symbol 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) on which the identification information is displayed is scrolled. The player can easily recognize that.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player. In the game machine 10 capable of generating the above, the starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the starting memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area (for example, the starting winning opening 36) is provided. , The display control means (effect control device 300) displays the hold object (hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) corresponding to the start storage on the display device 41, and holds the hold object hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b). Can be variably displayed by any one of a plurality of variable modes ("rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", "rotation 4'") different from each other, and a variable period of the plurality of variable modes. Are the same as each other.

When the rotation mode (variable mode) of the hold object (hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed by the above configuration, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the hold object (hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed. In the case of arbitrarily changing between a plurality of variable modes (rotation modes ("rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", "rotation 4'")) according to the game state, the production stage, and the like. Even if there is, it is possible to easily control the display of the hold object (hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b).

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B610C), and the variable display game. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, the variable display game has a preliminary motion display period for displaying a preliminary motion at the start of the variable display game, and a preliminary motion display period. The display control means (effect control device 300) includes a symbol object (large symbol) including a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is faster than the fluctuation speed of the period immediately after the end of the preliminary operation display (low-speed fluctuation 1, medium-speed fluctuation). The size of the objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the preliminary operation display period is made larger than the size in the high-speed fluctuation display period.

With the above configuration, attention is drawn to the preliminary movement, and the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the high-speed fluctuation display is made appropriately smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation to enter the field of view. By making it easier, the scroll can be easily recognized, and thereby the variable display of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized. Further, in the high-speed fluctuation display, the scroll speed can be enhanced by making the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C), and the variable display game. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of is a special result, the variable display game starts from the period immediately after the start of the variable display game (low speed fluctuation 1, medium speed fluctuation). The display control means (effect control device 300) includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is fast, and the display control means (effect control device 300) temporarily stops or stops the display at the end of the fluctuation display game. The size of the symbol object (including the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C) is made larger than the size of the symbol object in the high-speed fluctuation display period.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and the symbol object (large) that shifts from the high-speed fluctuation display to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period). The variation display mode of the symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for variable display of a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) to play a variable display game, and variable display. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the plurality of symbol objects large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (for example, Large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and a second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are included in the display control means. (Effect control device 300) sets a period during which the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same mode during a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game. , The first symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) is equal to the period of continuous display in the same mode, and the specific display other than the predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game. In the period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period), the period during which the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner is defined as the period for which the first symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed. , Large symbol objects 610A, 610B) are made shorter than the period during which they are continuously displayed in the same manner.

With the above configuration, the variation mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the variation display game can be easily recognized, and the first symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B) in a predetermined period can be easily recognized. By making the switching cycles of the identification information of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) equal to each other, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the variable display, thereby improving the interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for variable display of a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) to play a variable display game, and variable display. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (for example, , Large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and a second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). The means (effect control device 300) can variably display the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) in a manner of rotating the axis at a predetermined position, and the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610A). , 610B) can be displayed in a predetermined period with the identification information included in the front view, and the predetermined period can be changed based on the size of the second symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B). is there.

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). In this way, the interest can be improved by appropriately producing the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player. In the game machine 10 capable of generating the above, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays an object (holding object 633,633a, large symbol object 610C (medium symbol)) on the display device 41, and displays the object (holding object 633). , 633a, Large symbol object 610C (medium symbol)) is rotated and a specific rotation angle (rotation angle at which the character or identification information is viewed from the front, or other rotation angle, which is a feature of the character or identification information. It is variably displayed in a mode of pausing at a recognizable predetermined rotation angle, etc.), and the period for pausing the object can be changed based on the size of the object.

As a result, a specific rotation angle of the object (holding object 633,633a, large symbol object 610C (medium symbol)) (rotation angle at which the character or identification information is viewed from the front, or any other rotation angle, which is the character or identification It is possible to improve the visibility of the image related to the predetermined rotation angle or the like in which the feature of the information can be recognized, and further, the pause time is changed according to the size of the object. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the object is not monotonous, and the player pays close attention to it, which can improve the interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A and 610B) to play a variable display game, and the variable display game. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, a symbol object (for example, large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) Is variablely displayed by a variable display mode that includes identification information and scrolls along a specific path (longitudinal path) provided on the screen of the display device 41, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is a symbol. A plurality of objects (for example, large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific path in the order in which the identification information is switched, and the colors are associated with the identification information. The symbol objects related to the identification information in a cycle are displayed so that the colors of the large symbol objects adjacent to each other are different from each other.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the object body of the large symbol object (for example, large symbol 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) on which the identification information is displayed is scrolled. The player can easily recognize that.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player. In the game machine 10 capable of generating the above, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays the object (holding object 633,633a, decoration object 633b) on the display device 41, and the object (holding object 633,633a, decoration object). 633b) is a plurality of variable modes (("Rotation 1", "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3", "Rotation 4")) or ("Rotation 1'", "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3'") which are different from each other. , "Rotation 4'")), and the variable period of the plurality of variable modes is the same as each other.

When the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (holding object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed by the above configuration, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (holding object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed. Variable mode (rotation mode (("Rotation 1", "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3", "Rotation 4")) or ("Rotation 1'", "Rotation 2", "Rotation 3'", "Rotation 4'" It is possible to easily control the display of objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration objects 633b) even when the objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration objects 633b) are arbitrarily changed between ())) according to the game state, the production stage, and the like. it can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B610C), and the variable display game. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, the display control means (effect control device 300) is a symbol object (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). The size in the preliminary operation display period is made larger than the size in the display period after the preliminary operation display period (for example, the high-speed fluctuation display period).

With the above configuration, attention is drawn to the preliminary operation, and the size of the symbol object (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is reserved in the variation display (for example, high-speed variation display) of the display period after the preliminary operation display period. Scrolling can be easily recognized by making it appropriately smaller than the size at the time of fluctuation to make it easier to see, and thereby it is possible to easily recognize the fluctuation display of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). .. Further, in the variable display of the display period after the preliminary operation display period (for example, high-speed variable display), the scroll speed is reduced by making the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation. You can enhance the feeling.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for playing a variable display game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C), and the variable display game. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the above is a special result, the display control means (effect control device 300) displays a temporary stop display or a stop display at the end of the variable display game. The size of the symbol object (including the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C) is larger than the size of the symbol object in the specific display period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, and high-speed fluctuation display period). To do.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and stop from the fluctuation display (low speed fluctuation display, medium speed fluctuation display, high speed fluctuation display) in the specific display period. It is possible to easily recognize the variable display mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) that shift to the symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period).

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 64. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Reflection on the glass frame before and after moving the production button]
FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an area where the effect button 25 is reflected on the glass frame 15 before and after the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is moved, and FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the area where the effect button 25 is reflected on the glass frame 15. FIG. It is a figure explaining the area where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15 before and after the movement. 53 and 54 are schematic cross-sectional side views of a cross section including one life nail 36b (described later) as viewed in the lateral direction (horizontal direction).

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, a game area 32 is provided between the glass frame 15 and the game board main body 30a of the game board 30. In the game area 32, for example, a start winning opening 36 attached to the game board main body 30a and a life nail 36b attached substantially above the starting winning opening 36 are arranged. The life nail 36b is a game ball that has fallen from the stage portion 40b after rolling on the stage portion 40b (see FIG. 2), and a windmill or a road nail (between the start winning opening 36 and the windmill) arranged in the game area 32. It is a nail (obstacle nail, obstacle member, guide member) that guides a game ball that has flowed down toward the start winning opening 36 by a row of obstacle nails) or the like to the start winning opening 36. Normally, there are two life nails 36b, and the starting winning opening 36 is located directly below the gap between the two life nails 36b. Since the two life nails 36b overlap in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of FIGS. 53 and 54, only one life nail 36b is shown.

Inside the effect button 25 provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit (see FIG. 1), a plurality of LEDs 25c (for example, three) are arranged so as to be capable of emitting light according to the progress state of the game, and the LEDs 25c are arranged in a frame. It is configured as part of the decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4). The LED 25c may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED, but a full-color LED is desirable so as to enable various light emission modes. Further, the effect button 25 is arranged so as to be movable near the center of the upper portion of the upper plate unit. For example, the effect button 25 has a sliding member that fits into a groove-shaped member extending in a substantially front-back direction, and may move (slide) in a substantially front-back direction along the groove-shaped member. An elastic member such as a spring may be attached to the effect button 25, and the effect button 25 may be held in the initial position (normal position) by the elastic member unless a force is applied.

Then, for example, when the LED 25c emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is emitted as direct light toward the surroundings including the player's eyes.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the effect button 25 directed to the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) is partially reflected by the glass frame 15 and is reflected toward the front (front, player side). Become. In this embodiment, the reflection by the cover glass 14 (transparent member) held by the glass frame 15 (transparent member holding frame) is mainly dealt with. Further, as the transparent member, an acrylic plate or the like can be used in addition to the cover glass 14. The cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 is configured as a transparent member that allows the player to see the game board 30, but is not completely transparent (reflectance = 0) and has a predetermined reflectance, so that the glass frame 15 is reflective.

The light from the effect button 25 is reflected at various positions on the glass frame 15. Further, the intensity (reflectance) of the reflected light depends on the incident angle from the effect button 25, and tends to gradually increase as the incident angle becomes smaller. In the present embodiment, the incident angle is defined as the angle formed by the incident direction and the surface (reflection surface) of the cover glass 14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, when the effect button 25 is located at the initial position, the player moves the life nail 36b from the area A on the front upper side (the face or head side of the player) of the glass frame 15. The reflection of the effect button 25 when visually recognizing the image will be described.

When the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A, the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 located at the initial position appears to overlap with the life nail 36b, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 54. A virtual image is formed in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) at a position where the reflected light emitted from the effect button 25 and reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) toward the region A overlaps with the life nail 36b. This is because it is reflected. The virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected more clearly (firmly and clearly) as the light emission of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 becomes stronger.

The virtual image of the effect button 25 is not limited to the case where the LED 25c of the effect button 25 emits light, but the effect button 25 is illuminated and brightened by the LED of the frame decoration device 18, the LED of the board decoration device 46, the lighting of the amusement park, and the like. Even if it is, it can be reflected in the glass frame 15.

Further, as described above, when the incident angle (angle between the incident direction and the surface of the cover glass 14) of the light emitted from the effect button 25 at the initial position with respect to the glass frame 15 is small, the intensity of the reflected light becomes strong and the life nail. There is a strong tendency for the virtual image of the effect button 25 to be clearly reflected in the glass frame 15 at the position where it overlaps with 36b.

Subsequently, as shown in the positions after movement in FIGS. 53 and 54, when the effect button 25 is pulled forward (front, player side), it is emitted from the effect button 25 as shown by the thick solid line in FIG. 53. As the incident angle of the emitted light with respect to the glass frame 15 increases, the reflected light whose intensity is attenuated goes toward the region B slightly above the front of the glass frame 15 (the chest side of the player).

As a result, when the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A above the front of the glass frame 15 (on the face or head side of the player), the virtual image of the effect button 25 can be prevented from overlapping with the life nail 36b. Since the visibility of the nail 36b is improved, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (the chest side of the player), as shown by the broken line in FIG. 54, a virtual image of the effect button 25 at the position after the movement (after the movement (virtual image)). Appears to overlap with the life nail 36b. However, since the intensity of the reflected light is attenuated as the incident angle increases, even if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B, the visibility of the life nail 36b is suppressed from being deteriorated. be able to. The eyes of the player are usually in the area A, but if the player forcibly loses his / her posture, he / she may move to the area B.

The effect button 25 can be moved manually by the player or under the control of the effect control device 300. For example, the effect control device 300 can move the effect button 25 under predetermined conditions (for example, at the start of right-handed hitting, when returning from right-handed hitting to left-handed hitting), or in response to a player's operation. The player may manually move the effect button 25. In addition, for example, since left-handed is advantageous in the normal game state, it returns from right-handed to left-handed, and right-handed is advantageous in the specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) and special game state (big hit state, etc.). Therefore, it becomes a right-handed state.

Further, in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect button 25 is moved in order to prevent the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 from overlapping with the life nail 36b when visually recognizing from the area A. However, the effect button 25 may be moved in order to avoid overlapping with the start winning opening 36.

Further, not only when the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps with the life nail 36b and the start winning opening 36, but also various board elements attached to the game board 30 (components or components of the game board 30). , The second game machine component), the effect button 25 may be moved. For example, as board elements that can overlap with the virtual image of the effect button 25, obstacle nails other than the life nail 36b, the stage portion 40b, the warp passage 40e, the general drawing start gate 34, the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, ordinary Variable winning device (second starting winning opening) 37, display screen of display device 41, LED of board decoration device 46, LED of batch display device 50 (especially LED indicating design, hold, right-handed state), left-handed Examples include a target position (target position, bumping position, position at which the game ball is landed when hitting left), an LED of the lamp display device 80, and the like. In addition, on the board surface of the game board 30 (for example, the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the game area 32, the vicinity of the operation handle 24, the left side of the out port 30b, etc.), "Unauthorized monitoring (with magnetic / radio wave sensor, etc.)" and "Specifications" When displaying notifications, suggestions, and alerts to players and hall clerk such as "display (display of jackpot probability and number of prize balls)" and "prevention of immersiveness", a virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected on the display part. The effect control device 300 can control the movement of the effect button 25 so as not to be crowded. It should be noted that the effect control device 300 does not reflect the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the display screen of the display device 41 even when displaying the notification, suggestion, and alerting to the player or the hall clerk. As described above, the movement of the effect button 25 can be controlled.

Further, the target of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap the life nail 36b or the like is not limited to the effect button 25, but is installed on the projecting effect unit 13 or the like on the side of the frame, the upper part of the frame, the speaker 19, the upper plate unit, or the like. Various frame elements (first game machine components) such as the LED and the sub liquid crystal of the frame decoration device 18 are also listed as objects of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15. In the present embodiment, the frame element is a component or a component member of the opening / closing frame including the glass frame 15.

Further, the object on which the virtual image such as the effect button 25 is reflected is not limited to the glass frame 15, but can be reflected on a glossy member such as the surface of the game board 30 or the surface of various decorative members. The surface of the game board 30 and the surfaces of various decorative members are, for example, metal-plated, film-coated, or formed of a resin material, and can reflect light from the effect button 25 and the like. Further, for example, when the light guide plate is attached to the front of the game board 30, a virtual image such as the effect button 25 can be reflected on the light guide plate.

The effect control device 300 may be controlled so that the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is in the initial position is lower than the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is operated (or during operation) (initially). Emission intensity at position <Emission intensity after movement (or during operation)). In this way, by suppressing the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is in the initial position, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of visibility due to reflection. Further, when the player moves the effect button 25 by a manual operation, the player can freely move the effect button 25 according to the degree of reflection, and the operation surface of the effect button 25 is the player. Since it is in front of the player (the light emitted from the LED reaches the player directly), it is possible to easily observe the light emitting mode such as rainbow color or red. Therefore, when the operation suggestion image of the effect button 25 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 when the effect button 25 is operated, the player observes the effect button 25 that shines in the same color development and light emission mode as the operation suggestion image, for example. It becomes easier and the operability and decorativeness can be improved.

Further, the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 returns to the initial position may be reversed from the above case, or the light emission intensity after movement may be maintained (light emission intensity when returning to the initial position ≥ after movement). (Or during operation) emission intensity). In particular, when the effect button 25 is operated at the time of the jackpot notification, the player tends not to pay attention to the start winning slot 36 as the jackpot of the special variable winning device 39 is opened. Therefore, even if the visibility is lowered due to the reflection, the influence is reduced. Therefore, the effect control device 300 controls the light emission intensity of the effect button 25 so as to enhance the decorativeness, thereby performing a fanfare effect, a round effect, or the like. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production.

[Specific example of how the effect button is reflected on the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a specific example of the mode in which the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the effect button 25 entering the player's field of view.

In FIG. 55, the light emitting mode of the effect button 25 is displayed in black so that the reflection in the glass frame 15 can be easily understood.

When the LED 25c of the effect button 25 emits light, the player's eyes receive the direct light from the effect button 25 indicated by the solid arrow in FIG. 55 and the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 indicated by the broken line arrow.

When the reflected light enters the player's eyes, the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15. Therefore, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap with the member behind the glass frame 15, that is, the board element such as the life nail 36b attached to the game board 30, so that the board element can be seen. Visibility tends to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can weaken the light emission intensity of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 under predetermined conditions (for example, at the start of right-handed striking and when returning to left-handed striking). The effect control device 300 may turn off the LED 25c of the effect button 25.

According to such an aspect, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be thinned, so that when the player looks at the board element, the virtual image of the effect button 25 appears to overlap with the board element. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the board element from being deteriorated.

[Example of deformation of reflection on the glass frame before and after the movement of the effect button]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a region where the effect button 25 is reflected on the glass frame 15 before and after the movement of the effect button 25 of the modified example according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a region where the effect button 25 is reflected on the glass frame 15. FIG. It is a figure explaining the area where a player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15 before and after the movement of the effect button 25 of an example. In the following drawings, the same configuration as the effect button 25 and the like in FIGS. 53 and 54 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the present modification, the effect button 25 can be moved so as to be inclined obliquely from the initial position so that the upper portion faces the player, for example.

Therefore, when the effect button 25 is tilted diagonally as shown in the positions of FIGS. 56 and 57 after movement, a part of the light emitted from the effect button 25 is life-like as shown by the thick solid line in FIG. 56. It goes into the glass frame 15 at a position where it overlaps with the nail 36b.

The angle of incidence of the light emitted from the effect button 25 after movement with respect to the glass frame 15 is smaller than that at the initial position, but since the effect button 25 is inclined forward at an angle, the effect button 25 The amount of light (intensity) toward the rear of the glass frame 15, that is, toward the glass frame 15, is reduced (weakened). Further, in response to the decrease in the incident angle, the direction of the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 also becomes a direction close to the glass frame 15, and the direction is toward the region B above the player's head.

As a result, when the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A above the front of the glass frame 15 (on the face or head side of the player), the virtual image of the effect button 25 can be prevented from overlapping with the life nail 36b. Since the visibility of the nail 36b is improved, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (above the normal position of the player's head), as shown in FIG. 57, it is obliquely toward the rear of the game board 30 which is the position after the movement. The virtual image of the tilted effect button 25 (after movement (virtual image)) appears to overlap with the life nail 36b. However, since the area B is located above the normal position of the player's head, the life nail 36b and the virtual image of the effect button 25 must be intentionally looked into from the front upper side of the glass frame 15 such as when the player stands up. Can be prevented from being deteriorated in visibility of the life nail 36b in a normal seated state because they do not appear to overlap each other.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is attached with a decorative device 18a that projects forward from the center of the upper part of the glass frame 15 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, by locating the area B inside the decoration device 18a, the head of the player who is trying to look into the decoration device 18a comes into contact with the decoration device 18a, the glass frame 15, etc. , It is possible to substantially hide the virtual image of the effect button 25. Since the region B is located inside the decorative device 18a, the light emission of the effect button 25 is reflected, so that the decorativeness of the decorative device 18a can be improved.

Further, since the amount of light toward the glass frame 15 is reduced by the amount that the effect button 25 is tilted forward, the visibility of the life nail 36b is deteriorated even when the player visually recognizes the life nail 26b from the area B. Can be suppressed.

[Movement mode of the effect button of the second modification]
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a movement mode of the effect button 25 of the second modification according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58 (A), the effect button 25 of the second modification is a lever portion (lever stick,) composed of a grip portion 25d that can be grasped by the operator and a shaft portion 25e that supports the grip portion 25d. It is configured as a joystick). The grip portion 25d is provided with an LED 25c (not shown) capable of emitting light.

Then, the shaft portion 25e can be tilted back and forth, left and right, and the like while supporting the grip portion 25d as shown in FIG. 58 (B), and the effect button 25 performs a direction input operation (lever operation) by the player. It is possible to accept.

The grip portion 25d and the shaft portion 25e may be configured to be movable downward, and a push input operation of pressing the effect button 25 from above toward the upper plate unit may be accepted.

By configuring the effect button 25 in this way, the LED 25c of the grip portion 25d can be moved and the light emitting direction (angle) can be changed. Therefore, the visibility of the life nail 36b can be improved by the effect button 25 of the second modification as in the case where the entire effect button 25 of FIGS. 56 and 57 is tilted diagonally. You can improve your interest.

[Movement mode of the effect button of the third modification]
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a movement mode of the effect button 25 of the third modification according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), the effect button 25 of the third modification is configured as a lever portion including a grip portion 25d and a shaft portion 25e, and can be moved left and right on the upper plate unit. The upper plate unit is formed with an escape groove that allows the effect button 25 to move left and right.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the effect button 25 can be moved left and right along the relief groove of the upper plate unit. In the example of FIG. 59 (B), the effect button 25 is moved to the left of the upper plate unit.

By configuring the effect button 25 in this way, the effect button 25 can be moved to a position where it does not overlap with the life nail 36b to improve the visibility of the life nail 36b, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

[Fourth modification of reflection on the glass frame of the production button]
FIG. 60 shows an area in which the effect button 25 of the fourth modification according to the second embodiment is reflected in the glass frame 15 and an area in which the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15. It is a figure explaining.

As shown in FIG. 60, in this modification, a case where the stage portion 40b and the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appear to overlap will be described.

The stage portion 40b has an LED or the like (not shown) capable of emitting light, and is configured to be capable of emitting light according to an effect, a gaming state, or the like. The distance from the player-side end of each board member (stage portion 40b, life nail 36b, start winning opening 36) to the cover glass 14 becomes shorter in the order of stage portion 40b, starting winning opening 36, and life nail 36b (the stage portion 40b, the starting winning opening 36, and the starting winning opening 36b). Stage portion 40b> Starting winning opening 36> Life nail 36b (see FIG. 60). The distance from the end of each board member to the cover glass 14 may be shortened in the order of the stage portion 40b, the life nail 36b, and the start winning opening 36 (stage portion 40b> life nail 36b> starting winning opening 36). ..

Further, the effect button 25 has an LED 25c and is configured to be capable of emitting light, and a part of the light emitted from the effect button 25 to the glass frame 15 is reflected by the glass frame 15 and is forward (front, player side). ) Is reflected light. Then, when the player visually recognizes the stage portion 40b from the area A, the virtual image (effect button (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 appears to overlap the stage portion 40b as shown by the broken line in FIG. 60.

Here, when the light emitting intensity of the stage portion 40b is equal to or higher than the light emitting intensity of the effect button 25, even if the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap the stage unit 40b, the player can perform the stage unit. 40b is relatively easy to see. Therefore, even if the effect button 25 is lit, the player can easily follow the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b and enjoy the game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

On the other hand, when the light emitting intensity of the stage portion 40b is less than the light emitting intensity of the effect button 25, when the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap the stage unit 40b, the stage unit 40b can be visually recognized. The sex gets worse.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 determines the emission intensity of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 under a predetermined condition (for example, when returning from right-handed to left-handed due to a change in the gaming state or when the number of holdings is reduced to 2 or less). By weakening it, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the stage portion 40b, so that the interest of the game can be improved. The effect control device 300 may turn off the LED 25c of the effect button 25.

Further, since the light emission intensity of the stage portion 40b is stronger than that of the effect button 25, even if the amount of light of the effect button 25 is small, the light from the stage unit 40b having a large amount of light is reflected by the effect button 25. , The light emission of the effect button 25 can be supplemented. As a result, the effect button 25 can be made to shine by supplementarily utilizing the light from the stage portion 40b while suppressing the light emission intensity from the effect button 25, so that the light from the effect button 25 reflected by the glass frame 15 can be emitted. This can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the effect button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15 and deteriorating the visibility of the stage portion 40b.

[Protruding production unit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 61, the structure of the protrusion effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the protrusion effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment. On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device capable of executing a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game.

An outer lens member 13a is arranged on the protruding surface on the right side (outside of the gaming machine 1) of the protruding effect unit 13. On the surface of the outer lens member 13a, for example, a model character is drawn so as to be visible to a player passing from the right side to the left side of the gaming machine 1. The name of the gaming machine manufacturer or the name of the gaming machine may be drawn.

Inside the protrusion effect unit 13, a side light emitting substrate 13d having a plurality of outer LEDs 13b (for example, 6) and inner LEDs 13c (for example, 14) is arranged substantially parallel to the game board 30, and the frame is decorated. It is configured as part of device 18 (see FIG. 4). The outer LED 13b and the inner LED 13c are arranged on the side light emitting substrate 13d, but may be arranged individually. Further, the outer LED 13b may be an LED panel arranged substantially parallel to the outer lens member 13a.

An outer lens member 13a, a light guide plate 13e, a side base member 13f, and an inner lens member 13g are provided in front of the side light emitting substrate 13d in this order from the outside, and a cover member 13h is further provided so as to cover the periphery of these members. Be prepared.

The light guide plate 13e is arranged substantially vertically in front of the outer LED 13b of the side light emitting substrate 13d, and diffuses the light of the outer LED 13b taken in from the rear end surface to uniformly surface-emit the light, thereby causing the outer lens member 13a to emit light uniformly. Can be illuminated with a constant illuminance.

The side base member 13f is arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 13e, and the light guide plate 13e is fitted on the adjacent surface. Further, the side base member 13f is integrated with the inner lens member 13g. The side base member 13f functions as a reflector that refracts the light in the front direction of the inner LED 13c and changes it into the light in the left direction, and the light of the inner LED 13c via the side base member 13f causes the inner lens member 13g to be generated. Be illuminated.

[Specific example of the mode in which the protruding effect unit is reflected in the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a specific example of the mode in which the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the protruding effect unit 13 entering the player's field of view. In FIG. 62, the light emitting mode of the protrusion effect unit 13 is displayed in black.

When the projecting effect unit 13 emits light, the player's eyes see the direct light from the projecting effect unit 13 indicated by the solid arrow in FIG. 62 and the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) indicated by the broken arrow. And enter.

When the reflected light enters the player's eyes, the player visually recognizes the virtual image of the protruding effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15. Therefore, the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap with the board element such as the life nail 36b in the glass frame 15, so that the visibility of the board element tends to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can weaken the light emission intensity of the inner LED 13c of the protrusion effect unit 13 under predetermined conditions (for example, at the start of right-handed striking and when returning to left-handed striking). The effect control device 300 may turn off the inner LED 13c of the protrusion effect unit 13.

According to such an aspect, the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be thinned, so that when the player sees the board element, the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 overlaps with the board element. Even if it looks like a glass, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the board elements from deteriorating.

Further, as shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 62, a part of the light of the projecting effect unit 13 is reflected by the effect button 25 so as to enter the player's field of view, thereby assisting the light emission of the effect button 25. You may. In this way, by using the reflected light of the protruding effect unit 13 in the effect button 25, it is possible to weaken the light emission of the LED 25c and suppress the virtual image of the effect button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15, and the board element. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the light.

[Specific example of the mode in which the protruding effect unit is reflected in the glass frame]
FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the game board 30 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 that enter the player's field of view.

As shown in FIG. 63, the start winning opening 36 can be provided with an LED capable of emitting light according to an effect, a gaming state, a winning, etc., similarly to the stage portion 40b.

Further, the game board 30 is configured as a part of the upper effect unit 40c or the side effect unit 40d, and is housed in the game board 30 from the initial position to the rear (back side, game board) of the cover glass 14 according to the effect. A movable accessory 40f that can operate (on the 30 side) and substantially in front of the display device 41 is attached. The movable accessory 40f has a reflective member (which may be metal-plated) capable of reflecting light incident from below toward the front (front, player side). The reflecting member may be inclined so as to face forward and downward, for example, in order to facilitate the reflection of light incident from below in the forward direction.

Here, the light emitted from the LEDs of the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 not only enters the player's eyes as direct light, but can also illuminate the periphery of the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 63.

For example, the light from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 is reflected by the surface of the effect button 25 and becomes the reflected light that reaches the player's eyes. Therefore, the light emission effect of the effect button 25 can be effectively performed while suppressing the light emission intensity of the effect button 25 and suppressing the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15.

Further, the light from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 is reflected by the reflective member of the movable accessory 40f that operates behind the cover glass 14 and substantially in front of the display device 41, and becomes reflected light that reaches the player's eyes. You can also do it. Therefore, even if the movable accessory 40f does not have an LED, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movable accessory 40f appears to emit light, so that the number of parts can be suppressed and the decorativeness can be enhanced at low cost. Can improve the interest of.

In the above description, the visibility of the board element deteriorates because the virtual image of the frame element (constituent member of the glass frame 15) reflected in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) does not overlap with the board element. Suppressed that.

However, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element. For example, the effect control device 300 causes a decorative member provided on the right side of the game board 30 such as the projecting effect unit 13 to emit light when hitting to the right, and a virtual image of the decorative member is reflected on the right side of the game area 32. Can give a right-handed suggestion to a person. At that time, the effect control device 300, for example, when the projecting effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) emit light in rainbow colors, the body portion (board element) of the side effect unit 40d also emits light in rainbow colors, which is synergistic. The effect may make it easier to understand the right-handed suggestion to the player.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, for example, when the projecting effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) are made to emit yellow light, the body portion (board element) of the side effect unit 40d is also blue, which is a complementary color to yellow. It may appear inconspicuous white by emitting light, and the apparent glare of the light emission may be reduced when suggesting a right-handed hit to the player.

Further, the effect control device 300 may, for example, cause the protruding effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) to emit red light, and at the same time, cause the body portion (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to emit green light. In this way, by reflecting the light of the frame element that emits light in a color different from the board element (red) and superimposing it on the light emission of the board element (green) (red + green), the apparent color of the light Can be changed to create an area that looks yellow, and the decorativeness of the board element and the frame element by light emission may be improved.

Further, when the effect control device 300 wants to pay attention to the life nail 36b or the start winning opening 36 when returning to the left-handed strike, the effect control device 300 moves the effect button 25 in the reverse direction from the moved position as shown in FIG. 53 to the initial position. As a result, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 may be intentionally overlapped with the board element such as the life nail 36b. According to such an aspect, the virtual image of the frame element such as the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b, and the board element becomes brighter in an unusual manner, which is unexpected. Can be generated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, at the end of right-handed hitting (when returning to left-handed hitting), a virtual image of the decorative member is reflected on the left side of the game area 32, so that the player can be suggested to hit left-handed. Furthermore, a virtual image of the decorative member is reflected on the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 that opens the large winning opening, the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the general drawing starting gate 34 (pounding gate), and the like. You may suggest the game to. According to such an aspect, it is possible to perform an optical effect using reflected light even on a member such as an opening / closing door 39c where it is difficult to attach an LED, so that the decorativeness can be easily and inexpensively enhanced, and the game can be played. Can improve the interest of.

The effect control device 300 can enhance the effect by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element, but the board surface of the game board 30 and the display screen of the display device 41 can be enhanced. When displaying notifications, suggestions, and alerts such as "Unauthorized monitoring (magnetic / radio wave sensor installed, etc.)", "Spec display (display of jackpot probability and number of prize balls)", and "Prevention of immersiveness" Instead, the position of the frame element can be controlled so that the virtual image of the frame element (effect button 25, etc.) is not reflected on the display portion.

[Example of timing chart when executing a variable display game]
FIG. 64 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game).

When the variable display game is executed at the time (A) of FIG. 64, on the display screen of the display device 41, a special decorative symbol (decorative first symbols A to C, large symbol) and a decorative second symbol (small symbol) are displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, before and after the time (A), that is, before and after the start of the variable display game, the effect control device 300 weakens the light emission intensity of the LED of the board decoration device 46 as a board element and the LED of the frame decoration device 18 as a frame element. I have to. Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are relatively weakly illuminated by the board elements and frame elements.

At the time (B), the effect control device 300 executes the effect 1 on the display screen of the display device 41. The effect 1 is the first effect of an effect composed of a plurality of consecutive single effects (for example, effects 1 to 3) such as a pseudo continuous effect and a step-up notice.

Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation (single effect,) in which the decorative special symbol that is variablely displayed is pseudo-temporarily stopped and displayed (pseudo-stop display) between the start and the end of one variable display game. This is an effect in which a sub-effect (sub-effect, sub-variation) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times.

At the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous production, during the period from the start to the end of one variable display game, the pseudo-variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times without displaying the decorative special symbol that is variable-displayed in a pseudo-temporary stop display. It may be an effect that makes it appear as if it is being executed (multiple times). At that time, even when the temporary stop display is not performed, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as "NEXT" on the display screen of the display device 41, so that the effect shifts to the next pseudo-variation. Can be executed.

The step-up notice is an effect in which a single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step).

The pseudo continuous effect and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of consecutive single effects, and the greater the number of times, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, at the time (B), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from weak to strong in accordance with the effect 1. Therefore, for example, the virtual image of the frame element such as the effect button 25 is strongly reflected in the glass frame 15, and clearly overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b. As described above, the effect control device 300 can emphasize that the effect is executed by clearly reflecting the virtual image of the frame element in the initial stage (effect 1) of the effect in the variable display game.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 maintains the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) at a low level.

When the effect 1 ends at the time (C), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is reduced, and the visibility of the board element such as the life nail 36b is improved. If the effect 1 is a pseudo-variation, the decorative special symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as a pseudo-stop display.

Therefore, the frame element emits light after the middle stage of the production (after the production 1) in the variable display game in which the player is likely to carefully determine whether or not the starting memory is accumulated up to the upper limit (for example, 4). Since it weakens and the visibility of the board element is improved, it is easy for the player who is considering stopping the game to observe the game ball that wins the starting winning opening 36 and the game ball that rolls on the stage portion 40b above it. As a result, the game can be played efficiently, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, since the display screen of the display device 41 behind the cover glass 14 is also improved in visibility, the player can easily see the hold display of the display screen and the effect itself, and can improve the interest of the game. When changing the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak, the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) may be moved from the initial position so that the reflection of the virtual image does not overlap. Good.

Next, at the time (D) when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the end of the effect 1, the effect control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element). Therefore, the visibility of the board elements, the game ball, and the display screen of the display device 41 after the middle stage of the effect in the variable display game becomes higher, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

At the time (E), the effect control device 300 executes the effect 2 following the effect 1 on the display screen of the display device 41. The effect 2 is a second effect of the effect composed of a plurality of consecutive single effects (for example, effects 1 to 3). The effect control device 300 can perform the pseudo variation of the effect 2 so that the pseudo variation time (suggestion effect, advance notice effect time) is the same as that of the effect 1.

Further, at the time (E), the effect control device 300 weakly changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that was in the extinguished state in accordance with the effect 2. Therefore, as compared with the case where the frame element is turned off, the game board 30 and its surroundings are brightly illuminated in accordance with the execution of the effect 2, so that it is possible to emphasize that the effect 2 is executed. Since the light emission intensity of the frame element is weak, the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected in the glass frame 15 more than necessary, and the execution of the effect 2 can be emphasized.

After that, when the effect 2 is completed, the effect control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) again.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes the effect 3 as the third effect of the effect composed of a plurality of single effects on the display screen of the display device 41. The effect control device 300 weakly changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that has been turned off in accordance with the execution of the effect 3. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can emphasize the execution of the effect 3 without the virtual image of the frame element being reflected in the glass frame 15 more than necessary, as in the effect 2.

Subsequently, when the effect 3 ends at the time (F), the effect control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) and also turns off the board decoration device 46 (board element). Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened. In this way, by turning off the lights before the effect control device 300 executes the SP reach effect described later, the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened, resulting in a mode different from the normal effect, which is surprising. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

At the time (G), the effect control device 300 executes the SP reach effect on the display screen of the display device 41. At that time, the effect control device 300 enhances the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that were in the extinguished state. Therefore, since the game board 30 and its surroundings are brightly illuminated, it is possible to emphasize the execution of the SP reach effect.

Further, at the time (G), the light emission intensity of the frame element becomes stronger, so that the virtual image of the frame element is reflected in the glass frame 15 more intensely. Brightness can be emphasized, and a flashy production that enhances the production effect can be performed. That is, in the latter half of the production in the variable display game in which the starting memory is likely to be accumulated up to the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces), the player during the stop hit does not observe the surrounding game balls such as the starting winning opening 36 and the stage portion 40b. Therefore, even if the virtual image of the frame element is violently reflected in the glass frame 15, the effect of the SP reach effect can be enhanced without affecting the game playability, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The light emitting intensity of the frame decoration device 18 is strong, and the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element is emphasized in the glass frame 15, but the light emitting intensity of the board decoration device 46 is also strong and emits the same amount of light. Therefore, the visibility of the board element does not deteriorate more than necessary, and the player can observe the board element.

After that, when the SP reach effect is completed at the time (H), the effect control device 300 changes the emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the SP reach effect has ended by visually recognizing that the emission intensity of the board element and the frame element settles down weakly with the end of the SP reach effect on the display screen.

The effect control device 300 may not only increase the light emission intensity when emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, but also enhance the reflection by blinking. Further, the effect control device 300 changes the emission color of the frame element according to the expectation of the jackpot, thereby changing the color of the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 to suggest the expectation of the jackpot. May be good.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs an effect of emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 in addition to the above-mentioned SP reach effect, when the jackpot symbol is stopped, during the fanfare effect, during the ending effect, and on the right. It can be executed when hitting, when hitting back to the left, etc. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped, the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 may be emphasized and reflected in the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the normal drawing starting gate 34 (pounding gate), or the like. .. In this way, the effect control device 300 controls the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 according to the game, so that each effect can be enhanced and the player can be suggested how to hit. ..

Further, in the above timing chart, the effect control device 300 controls the emission intensity of the frame element and the board element at the time of the effect in one variable display game, and reflects the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15. Although it was decided to perform the effect, it may be performed over a plurality of variable display games.

For example, the effect control device 300 is a continuous advance notice (chance eye notice) which is an effect of displaying a special pattern of a decoration that is out of common mode over a plurality of variable display games, and a start memory related to a hold during standby (before digestion). When executing the look-ahead notice for notifying the jackpot expectation degree, it is possible to perform an effect of reflecting a virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game, special figure variable display game) and an effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game-related effect. A special game state (big hit game, big hit state) that is advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). The game machine 10 has a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) formed on the front surface of the game board 30 so that the game board 30 can be visually recognized, and the game machine 10 is arranged around the transparent member to match the effect executed by the effect control means. Frame elements that can emit light (effect button 25, protrusion effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) and board elements (life nail 36b, start winning opening 36, stage portion 40b, movable combination) arranged on the game board 30. Object 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member, and the player meets certain conditions (when automatically moving in response to the player's operation or production, when starting right-handed or returning to left-handed). When (in the case of manual operation of) is established, it does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member from overlapping with the board element, and the visibility of the board element is improved, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frame element has a position (front, back, front) that does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element when a predetermined condition is satisfied from the initial position where the frame element overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member. It can be moved to the tilted position, sideways).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member from overlapping with the board element due to the physical movement of the frame element, so that the visibility of the board element is similarly improved. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided on the front surface of the gaming board 30 with a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) formed so that the gaming board 30 can be visually recognized, and an effect control arranged around the transparent member. A frame element (effect button 25, protrusion effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) capable of emitting light according to the effect executed by the means (effect control device 300) and a board element (life nail) arranged on the game board 30. 36b, start winning opening 36, stage portion 40b, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member, and overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element when a predetermined condition (at the time of right-handed striking, at the end of right-handed striking) is satisfied.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member is intentionally overlapped with the board element when a predetermined condition is satisfied, unexpectedness is generated and the effect of production can be enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to suggest a game (suggest how to hit), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by reflecting the virtual image of the frame element on the board element where it is difficult to provide a light emitting member (LED), an optical effect using reflected light can be performed, so that the decorativeness can be easily and inexpensively enhanced. , The fun of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied from the initial position (accommodation position in the gaming board 30) where the board element (movable accessory) does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member. It can be moved (movable, movable) to a position (behind the transparent member) that overlaps the virtual image of the frame element. Alternatively, the frame element (for example, the effect button 25) is a frame element when a predetermined condition is satisfied from a position where the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member does not overlap with the board element (for example, the position after movement in FIG. 53). Can be transferred (movable, movable) to a position where the virtual image of is overlapped with the board element (for example, the initial position in FIG. 53).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member overlaps with the board element, so that the board element becomes brighter in an unusual manner, which causes unexpectedness and makes the game more enjoyable. Can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game, special figure variable display game) and an effect control capable of executing an effect related to the game. A means (effect control device 300) is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) arranged in front of the gaming machine 10 and a first gaming machine configuration capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner while being arranged in front of the gaming machine 10 with respect to the transparent member. Elements (frame elements (effect button 25, protrusion effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)) and second game machine components (board elements (life nail 36b, life nail 36b,) arranged behind the game machine 10 from the transparent member). It is provided with a start winning opening 36, a stage portion 40b, a movable accessory 40f, a board decoration device 46, etc.)). The second game machine component overlaps with the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected on the transparent member, and starts right-handed when it moves automatically in response to a player's operation or effect. When returning to time or left-handed, in the case of manual operation by the player), it does not overlap with the virtual image of the first game machine component.

According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the first game machine component (frame element) reflected on the transparent member from overlapping with the second game machine component (board element), and the second game mechanism. Since the visibility of the elements is improved, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a display means (display screen of the display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined effect, a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) arranged in front of the gaming machine 10. A first gaming machine component (frame element (effect button 25, protrusion effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)) that is arranged in front of the game machine 10 and can emit light in a predetermined manner and transparent. A second gaming machine component (board element (life nail 36b, starting winning opening 36, stage portion 40b, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.)) arranged behind the gaming machine is provided. .. The second game machine component overlaps with the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected on the transparent member, and does not overlap with the virtual image of the first game machine component when a predetermined condition (for example, pseudo continuous effect) is satisfied. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute specific effects (for example, effects 2 and 3 (second and third single effects of the pseudo continuous effect)) by the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to such a game machine 10, a specific effect is executed in a state where the virtual image of the first game machine component (frame element) reflected on the transparent member does not overlap with the second game machine component (board element). Therefore, the visibility of the second gaming machine component and the display means is improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

For example, when the frame element or the board element has a specific light emitting mode, the image notifying that the frame element or the board element has a specific light emitting mode is at a position where the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected (for example, regions A to B in FIG. 53). Display in a display area (display area on the display screen of the display device 41 or a display area of another board element or frame element) in an area other than the above, a position deviated from the front such as the right side portion or the upper right portion of the glass frame 15. It may be. In this way, by displaying the image notifying that the light emitting mode is in a specific light emitting mode at a position where the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected (a position where the virtual image of the frame element does not overlap), the player can easily gaze at the image. Therefore, even if reflection occurs, the player's line of sight can be deflected to another place (display device 41 as a board element or another board element or frame element) away from the virtual image of the frame element, and the game can be played. Can improve the interest of.

Further, in order to make it difficult to understand that the frame element is reflected, the light emitting mode of the board element or the light emitting member arranged in the vicinity of the board element may be the same as or the same color as the frame element. For example, when the light emitting mode of the frame element is a circulating light emitting mode that switches colors, the light emitting mode of the board element can also be a circulating light emitting mode. At that time, the effect control device 300 may make it easier for the player to recognize which light emission is which, by making the color and the circulation speed different from each other as the circulation light emission mode of the frame element and the board element. Further, the light emitting mode of the frame element may be continued by the light emitting mode of the board element or the light emitting mode of the light emitting member near the board element, and a series of effects may be executed by utilizing the reflection (). A natural effect may be performed. The frame element may continue the light emitting mode of the board element).

Further, the shape of the board element and the frame element can be various. For example, when the board element is circular and the frame element is semi-circular, even if the frame element is reflected on the circular board element, it can be overlapped with the light emission of the circular board element to make it inconspicuous. Further, the virtual image of the frame element may be made relatively inconspicuous by making the light emitting mode of the board element more conspicuous than the frame element by setting the light emitting mode of the board element to rainbow color, high-speed circulation lighting, or the like. Further, the effect control device 300 makes the board element stand out by displaying a display (for example, an effect) corresponding to the board element in the vicinity of the board element (for example, the lower right corner of the display screen) on the display screen of the display device 41. You may let it.

10 Pachinko machine 25 Direction button 30 Gaming board 32 Gaming area 36 1st start winning opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable prize device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
633b Decorative object

Claims (1)

A game in which a display device is provided with display control means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbol objects to perform a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated. In the machine
The fluctuation display game includes a preliminary movement display period for displaying a preliminary movement at the start of the fluctuation display game, a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is faster than the fluctuation speed in the period immediately after the end of the preliminary movement display, and the above. Includes a temporary stop display period for temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol object and a stop display period for stopping and displaying the symbol object.
The display control means
The size of the symbol object in the preparatory movement display period can be made larger than the size in the high-speed fluctuation display period.
A gaming machine characterized in that the size of the symbol object in the temporary stop display period or the stop display period can be made larger than the size in the high-speed fluctuation display period.

Images